WO2022016542A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022016542A1
WO2022016542A1 PCT/CN2020/104546 CN2020104546W WO2022016542A1 WO 2022016542 A1 WO2022016542 A1 WO 2022016542A1 CN 2020104546 W CN2020104546 W CN 2020104546W WO 2022016542 A1 WO2022016542 A1 WO 2022016542A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
information
access network
cell
identifier
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/104546
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
酉春华
徐小英
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/104546 priority Critical patent/WO2022016542A1/en
Publication of WO2022016542A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022016542A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the terminal device in the connected state can perform data transmission with the access network device, and when the terminal device in the inactive state wants to perform data transmission with the access network device, it needs to complete multiple information exchanges to enter the connected state. That is to say, the terminal device in the inactive state needs to enter the connected state first, and then perform data transmission with the access network device. In this way, unnecessary power consumption and signaling overhead will be caused.
  • the present application provides a communication method and apparatus, which are used to implement uplink transmission of a terminal device in an inactive state and reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of uplink transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a terminal device, or can also be applied to a chip in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives first indication information from the access network device, and the first indication information indicates the first configuration authorization CG in the inactive state; and, in the inactive state Next, use the first CG to send the first uplink information.
  • the terminal device in the inactive state can use the CG to send the uplink information.
  • the function of the uplink transmission can be effectively reduced. consumption and signaling overhead.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG
  • the identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the method further includes: receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the first A CG belongs to one or more CGs (or one or more CGs include the first CG).
  • the access network device can determine some CGs from the CGs in the connected state allocated to the terminal device, for the terminal device to send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG,
  • the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the method further includes: receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the first CG is different from one or more CGs.
  • the access network device can configure a new CG for the terminal device for the terminal device to send uplink information in an inactive state.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to send the first CG after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the second uplink information, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
  • the method further includes: determining that the timing advance TA value of the cell corresponding to the first CG is valid.
  • the method further includes: sending request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG,
  • the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  • the access network device can refer to the request information and configure the terminal device with an inactive CG in a more targeted manner.
  • the candidate CGs include the first CG.
  • the method further includes: receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the candidate CGs are Belong to one or more CGs (or one or more CGs include candidate CGs).
  • the request information is carried in the first message, and the first message is used for the random access procedure.
  • the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a first access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in the first access network device.
  • the first access network device obtains first indication information, the first indication information indicates the first CG in an inactive state, and the first CG is used for the terminal The device sends the first uplink information in the inactive state; and sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG
  • the identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the method further includes: sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used by the terminal device to send the second uplink information in a connected state; the first CG belonging to the one or more CGs (or in other words, the one or more CGs include the first CG).
  • the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the first CG
  • the corresponding uplink carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the method further includes: sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used by the terminal device to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the first A CG is different from the one or more CGs.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is also used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state , or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
  • the method further includes: receiving request information from a terminal device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG;
  • the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is the normal uplink carrier or the supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  • the candidate CG includes the first CG.
  • the method further includes: sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the candidate The CG belongs to the one or more CGs (or the one or more CGs include the candidate CG).
  • the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
  • the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
  • acquiring the first indication information includes: receiving the first indication information from the second access network device; wherein the first access network device is the primary access network device of the terminal device, and the second access network device is the primary access network device of the terminal device.
  • the access network equipment is the auxiliary access network equipment of the terminal equipment.
  • request information is sent to the second access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data expected to arrive; the size of the data expected to arrive; the data expected to arrive arrival time information.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the second access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to, after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, The second uplink information is sent, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a terminal device, or can also be applied to a chip in the terminal device.
  • the method applied to a terminal device as an example, in the method, indication information from an access network device is received, the indication information indicates the first cell corresponding to the inactive state; stay in the first district.
  • the terminal device can camp on the first cell in the inactive state without performing cell measurement and cell selection or reselection process operations, thereby The processing burden of the terminal device can be effectively reduced, and the power of the terminal device can be saved.
  • the first cell includes a first CG, and the first CG is used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the terminal equipment is made to camp on the cell with the inactive CG as much as possible, which facilitates the subsequent use of the inactive CG to send the first uplink information in the inactive state, and improves the utilization rate of the inactive CG. Use resources more efficiently.
  • the indication information includes an identifier of the first cell; or, the indication information includes identifiers of multiple cells in the inactive state, and the multiple cells include the first cell.
  • the cell quality of the first cell is greater than the cell quality of other cells in the plurality of cells.
  • the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the first CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG
  • the carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the indication information further includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, and the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or Supplement upstream carrier.
  • the method further includes: after determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition, performing relaxation measurement on the first cell.
  • determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition includes: determining that the cell quality of the first cell is greater than or equal to a first threshold; or, determining the cell quality of the first cell within the first time period greater than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the terminal equipment can be prevented from changing the camping cell as much as possible, thereby ensuring that the terminal equipment can use the inactive CG to send uplink information, and can also reduce the processing burden of the terminal equipment and save the power of the terminal equipment.
  • performing relaxed measurement on the first cell includes at least one of the following: not measuring the intra-frequency cell of the first cell; not measuring the inter-frequency cell of the first cell; not performing cell reselection; Cell selection.
  • the method further includes: after determining that the first cell meets the second preset condition, terminating the relaxation measurement on the first cell.
  • the terminal equipment can perform cell selection or cell reselection, and then camp on other suitable cells.
  • determining that the first cell meets the second preset condition includes at least one of the following: determining that the cell quality of the first cell is less than a second threshold; determining that the cell quality of the first cell within the second time period is less than the second threshold; it is determined that the number of consecutive failures to send uplink information using the first CG is greater than or equal to the third threshold; it is determined that the number of consecutive failures to initiate random access in the first cell is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold.
  • the method further includes: receiving configuration information from the access network device, where the configuration information includes at least one of the following: a first threshold, a second threshold, a third threshold, a fourth threshold, a first threshold The duration of the time period and the duration of the second time period.
  • the indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to an access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in an access network device.
  • the access network device determines indication information, the indication information indicates the first cell corresponding to the inactive state, and the first cell is used by the terminal device in the non-active state. camping in the active state; and sending the indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first cell includes a first CG, and the first CG is used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the indication information includes an identifier of the first cell; or, the indication information includes identifiers of multiple cells in the inactive state, and the multiple cells include the first cell.
  • the cell quality of the first cell is greater than the cell quality of other cells in the one or more cells.
  • the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the first CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG
  • the carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the indication information further includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, and the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or Supplement upstream carrier.
  • the indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message.
  • the method described in the fourth aspect corresponds to the method described in the third aspect.
  • the beneficial effects of the related technical features in the method described in the fourth aspect reference may be made to the description of the third aspect, and details are not repeated here. .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a first access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in the first access network device.
  • the first access network device receives first indication information from the second access network device, and the first indication information indicates the first inactive state.
  • CG where the first CG is used for the terminal device to send uplink information in the inactive state; and, to send the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the secondary network device can also configure the terminal device with an inactive CG, so that the terminal device in the inactive state can camp on a cell within the coverage of the secondary access network device.
  • the uplink information can also be sent, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of the uplink transmission.
  • the cell corresponding to the first CG is the cell of the second access network device.
  • the method further includes: sending request information to the second access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data expected to reach the terminal device; the size of the data expected to reach the terminal device; Arrival time information of the data that will arrive at the terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG
  • the identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG,
  • the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the second access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to, after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, Send the second uplink information, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state; and, the second indication information is sent to the terminal device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a second access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in the second access network device.
  • the second access network device determines the first indication information, the first indication information indicates the first CG in an inactive state, and the first CG is used for the terminal The device sends uplink information in the inactive state; and sends the first indication information to the first access network device.
  • the cell corresponding to the first CG is the cell of the second access network device.
  • the method further includes: receiving request information from the first access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data expected to reach the terminal device; the size of the data expected to reach the terminal device; Arrival time information of the data that will arrive at the terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to the first CG; identifier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG,
  • the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information to the first access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further used to send the terminal device after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state
  • the second uplink information or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state; and the second indication information is sent to the terminal device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip provided in the terminal device.
  • the communication device has the function of implementing the first aspect or the third aspect.
  • the communication device includes a module or unit or means corresponding to the steps involved in executing the first aspect or the third aspect, and the function Either unit or means may be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to implement communication between the communication device and other devices, for example, the communication unit is used to receive data from Configuration information of the terminal device; the processing unit can be used to perform some internal operations of the communication device.
  • the functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the first aspect above.
  • the communication apparatus includes a processor, and may also include a transceiver, where the transceiver is used for transmitting and receiving signals, and the processor executes program instructions to accomplish any of the first aspect or the third aspect above methods in possible designs or implementations.
  • the communication device may further include one or more memories, which are used for coupling with the processor, and the memories may store necessary computer programs or instructions for implementing the functions involved in the first aspect or the third aspect.
  • the processor can execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, make the communication device realize any possible design or implementation of the first aspect or the third aspect. method.
  • the communication device includes a processor, which may be operative to couple with the memory.
  • the memory may hold necessary computer programs or instructions to implement the functions referred to in the first or third aspect above.
  • the processor can execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, make the communication device realize any possible design or implementation of the first aspect or the third aspect. method.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, wherein the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute any possible design or implementation of the first aspect or the third aspect above method in method.
  • the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be an access network device (such as a first access network device or a second access network device) or a chip provided in the access network device.
  • the communication device has the function of implementing the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device includes performing the functions related to the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspect.
  • the modules or units or means corresponding to the operation can be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to implement communication between the communication device and other devices, for example, the communication unit is used to receive data from Configuration information of the terminal device; the processing unit can be used to perform some internal operations of the communication device.
  • the functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a processor, which may be operative to couple with the memory.
  • the memory may hold necessary computer programs or instructions to implement the functions referred to in the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects described above.
  • the processor can execute computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the communication device can implement any of the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects above. methods in possible designs or implementations.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions to implement the functions involved in the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects above.
  • the processor can execute computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the communication device can implement any of the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects above. methods in possible designs or implementations.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, wherein the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect or the first aspect The method in any possible design or implementation of the six aspects.
  • the processor may be implemented by hardware or by software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory.
  • the above processors may be one or more, and the memory may be one or more.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor. In a specific implementation process, the memory and the processor may be integrated on the same chip, or may be separately provided on different chips. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the manner of setting the memory and the processor.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system may include a terminal device and an access network device; wherein, the terminal device may be used to execute any of the possible design methods in the first aspect above,
  • the access network device can be used to execute the method in any possible design of the second aspect above; or, the terminal device can be used to execute the method in any possible design of the third aspect above, the access network device
  • the method in any possible design of the fourth aspect may be used to perform the above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system may include a first access network device and a second access network device, where the first access network device may be configured to perform the above-mentioned fifth aspect
  • the second access network device may be used to execute the method in any possible design of the sixth aspect above.
  • the communication system may further include a terminal device, and the terminal device establishes dual connections with the first access network device and the second access network device.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer-readable instructions are stored in the computer storage medium, and when a computer reads and executes the computer-readable instructions, the computer is made to execute the above-mentioned first aspect
  • the method in any possible design to the sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer reads and executes the computer program product, causes the computer to execute the method in any possible design of the first to sixth aspects.
  • the present application provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and is configured to read and execute a software program stored in the memory, so as to implement the above-mentioned first to sixth aspects A method in any of the six possible designs.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable;
  • FIG. 2a is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU separation architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2b is a schematic diagram of still another CU-DU separation architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a four-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a two-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a possible exemplary block diagram of the apparatus involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • a terminal device such as a terminal device 1301 or a terminal device 1302
  • the wireless network includes a radio access network (RAN) and a core network (core network, CN); wherein, the RAN may also be called an access network (AN), which is used to access terminal devices to Wireless network, CN is used to manage terminal equipment and provide gateway for communication with DN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • core network core network
  • CN core network
  • AN access network
  • CN is used to manage terminal equipment and provide gateway for communication with DN.
  • the RAN may include one or more access network devices, such as access network device 1101 and access network device 1102.
  • the CN may include one or more core network elements, such as the core network element 120 .
  • the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network network elements are described in detail below.
  • Terminal equipment also known as user equipment (UE) includes equipment that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users, for example, may include handheld devices with wireless connectivity, or processing devices connected to wireless modems .
  • the terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/machine-type communication ( machine-to-machine/machine-type communications, M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (Internet of things, IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, remote station, access point (access point, AP) ), remote terminal, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, or user equipment, etc.
  • these may include mobile telephones (or "cellular" telephones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-embedded mobile devices, and the like.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • constrained devices such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing power, etc.
  • information sensing devices such as barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • the device for realizing the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a combined device or component capable of realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • a chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • An access network device is a node or device that accesses a terminal device to a wireless network, and the access network device may also be called a base station.
  • Access network equipment includes but is not limited to: a new generation base station (generation Node B, gNB), an evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB), a radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC) in the 5G communication system, Node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station ((home evolved nodeB, HeNB) or (home node B, HNB)) , baseband unit (baseBand unit, BBU), transmitting and receiving point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (transmitting point, TP), or mobile switching center.
  • generation Node B, gNB generation Node B
  • eNB evolved node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B no
  • the device for implementing the function of the access network device may be the access network device, or may be a device capable of supporting the access network device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a device capable of realizing the function of the access network device
  • the combination device and component of the device can be installed in the access network equipment.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the device for implementing the functions of the access network equipment as an example of the access network equipment.
  • the interface between the access network device and the terminal device may be a Uu interface (or called an air interface).
  • the names of these interfaces may remain unchanged, or may be replaced with other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • the communication between the access network device and the terminal device follows a certain protocol layer structure, for example, the control plane protocol layer structure may include an RRC layer, a packet data convergence layer protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer, a wireless link.
  • the user plane protocol layer structure may include the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the physical layer.
  • the PDCP layer may also include a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer.
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • the access network device may implement the functions of protocol layers such as RRC, PDCP, RLC, and MAC by one node, or may implement the functions of these protocol layers by multiple nodes.
  • an access network device may include one or more centralized units (centralized units, CUs) and one or more distributed units (distributed units, DUs), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU .
  • an interface between a CU and a DU may be referred to as an F1 interface, wherein a control plane (control panel, CP) interface may be an F1-C, and a user plane (user panel, UP) interface may be an F1-U.
  • the CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, as shown in Figure 2a, the functions of the PDCP layer and the above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (such as the RLC layer and the MAC layer, etc.) are set in the DU.
  • the above division of the processing functions of the CU and DU according to the protocol layer is only an example, and can also be divided in other ways, for example, the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the RLC layer and the following protocol layers.
  • the function of the CU is set in the DU.
  • the CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers.
  • the CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with protocol layers. In one design, some functions of the RLC layer and functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are placed in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are placed in the DU.
  • the functions of the CU or DU can also be divided according to the service type or other system requirements, for example, by the delay, the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in the DU, and do not need to meet the delay.
  • the required functionality is set in the CU.
  • the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network.
  • the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management; the DU can have multiple radio functions, or the radio functions can be set remotely. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the functions of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may also be implemented by different entities.
  • the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane are separated and implemented by different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (ie, the CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity. (ie the CU-UP entity), the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the access network device.
  • the interface between the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity may be the E1 interface
  • the interface between the CU-CP entity and the DU may be the F1-C interface
  • the interface between the CU-UP entity and the DU may be the F1-U interface interface.
  • one DU and one CU-UP can be connected to one CU-CP.
  • one DU can be connected to multiple CU-UPs
  • one CU-UP can be connected to multiple DUs.
  • the signaling generated by the CU may be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device may be sent to the CU through the DU.
  • the DU may not parse the signaling, but directly encapsulate it through the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU.
  • the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario.
  • the signaling of the RRC or PDCP layer will eventually be processed as the data of the physical layer and sent to the terminal device, or converted from the received data of the physical layer.
  • the signaling of the RRC or PDCP layer can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or sent by the DU and the radio frequency device.
  • the core network elements in the CN may include access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, and user plane elements.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • Policy control function policy control function
  • PCF policy control function
  • the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above can be applied to communication systems of various radio access technologies (RATs), such as 4G (or long term evolution (LTE)) communication systems, It can also be a 5G (or called new radio (NR)) communication system, and of course it can also be a future communication system.
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • 4G or long term evolution (LTE)
  • LTE long term evolution
  • NR new radio
  • the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • the apparatuses in the following embodiments of the present application may be located in terminal equipment or access network equipment according to the functions implemented by them.
  • the access network device may be a CU, or a DU, or an access network device including a CU and a DU.
  • the states of the terminal equipment may include an RRC idle state, an RRC inactive state, and an RRC connected state.
  • the RRC idle state may be referred to as idle state for short
  • the RRC inactive state may be referred to as inactive state or the third state for short
  • the RRC connected state may be referred to as connected state for short.
  • the access network device when the terminal device is in the connected state, there is an RRC connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the access network device knows that the terminal device is within the coverage or management range of the access network device, for example, the access network device knows that the terminal device is within the coverage of the cell managed by the access network device; the core The network knows which access network device covers or manages the terminal device, and the core network knows through which access network device the terminal device can be located or found.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device is in an inactive state, there is no RRC connection between the terminal device and the access network device. At this time, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is within the coverage or management range of the access network device, for example, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is within the coverage of the cell managed by the access network device
  • the core network knows which access network device covers or manages the terminal device, and the core network knows through which access network device the terminal device can be located or found.
  • the terminal device may receive a paging message, a synchronization signal, a broadcast message, and/or system information, etc. from the access network device.
  • the access network device When the terminal device is in an idle state, there is no RRC connection between the terminal device and the access network device. At this time, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is within the coverage of the access network device or whether it is within the management scope of the access network device, for example, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is in the access network device. Within the coverage of the cell managed by the network access device; the core network does not know which access network device the terminal device is within the coverage or management range, and the core network does not know through which access network device it can locate or find the terminal. equipment. When the terminal device is in the RRC idle state, the terminal device may receive paging messages, synchronization signals, broadcast messages, and/or system information, etc. from the access network device.
  • a possible way is to restore the RRC connection with the access network device, that is, the RRC state of the terminal device can be switched to the RRC connected state, and then send the uplink data. data; another possible way is to send uplink data in the random access process.
  • the random access procedure may include a four-step random access procedure and a two-step random access procedure.
  • the terminal device can send uplink data through the third message (Msg3) in the four-step random access process, which can be called early data transmission (EDT); or, the terminal device can also send the uplink data through the two-step random access process.
  • the message A (MsgA) sends the uplink data.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a four-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the four-step random access procedure may include:
  • the access network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes random access configuration information and a data volume threshold that can be sent through the third message; correspondingly, the terminal device can receive the configuration information.
  • the random access configuration information may include a random access preamble (preamble) and/or random access resources (random access resources are used for sending random access preambles), the random access preamble and/or random access Incoming resources can be dedicated to EDT.
  • preamble a random access preamble
  • random access resources random access resources are used for sending random access preambles
  • the random access preamble and/or random access Incoming resources can be dedicated to EDT.
  • the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the access network device through a physical random access channel (PRACH), that is, sends a message 1 (Msg1) to the access network device, then the access network device sends a message from the terminal to the access network device.
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • Msg1 message 1
  • Device receives message 1.
  • the data volume of the uplink data may be compared with the data volume threshold, and if it is determined that the data volume of the uplink data is less than or equal to the data volume threshold, S301 may be performed. In addition, if the data volume of the uplink data is greater than the data volume threshold, the terminal device will not be able to perform EDT, but needs to establish or restore an RRC connection first, and then send the uplink data.
  • the access network device After detecting the random access preamble sent by the terminal device, the access network device sends a random access response (RAR) to the terminal device, that is, sends a message 2 (Msg2) to the terminal device, then the terminal device sends a random access response (RAR) to the terminal device.
  • RAR random access response
  • Msg2 message 2
  • RAR random access response
  • Message 2 is received from the access network device.
  • message 2 may indicate the resource location of a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel, PUSCH).
  • the terminal device sends a message 3 (Msg3) to the access network device through the PUSCH according to the resource location of the PUSCH indicated by the message 2, and the access network device receives the message 3 from the terminal device.
  • message 3 may include uplink data.
  • the terminal device can determine whether the message 2 indicates whether the PUSCH can be used to send uplink data, and if so, the terminal device can perform the above S303. Otherwise, the terminal device will not be able to perform EDT, but needs to establish or restore the RRC connection first, and then send the uplink data.
  • the access network device receives the message 3, and sends the message 4 (Msg4) to the terminal device, correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the message 4 from the access network device.
  • message 3 may include an RRC connection resume request (RRC connection resume request).
  • message 4 may include one or more of the following information: RRC connection resume (RRC connection resume) message, RRC connection release (RRC connection release) message, PUSCH acknowledgement (acknowledgement)/ Negative acknowledgement (NACK), and power control commands, etc.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a two-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, the two-step random access procedure may include:
  • the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the access network device through PRACH, and sends uplink data to the access network device through the PUSCH, that is, the terminal device sends a message A (MsgA) to the access network device.
  • MsgA message A
  • the access network device after receiving the message A, the access network device sends a message B (MsgB) to the terminal device.
  • MsgB message B
  • message A may include an RRC connection recovery request message.
  • message B may include one or more of the following information: RRC connection recovery message, RRC connection release message, ACK/NACK of PUSCH in message A, and power control commands, etc.
  • the access network device needs to decode two parts of content: namely, the random access preamble and the uplink data. Generally, it is easier to decode the random access preamble, but more difficult to decode the uplink data.
  • the MsgB may include a successful random access response (success RAR); when the access network device successfully decodes the random access preamble but fails to decode the uplink data , the MsgB may include a fallback random access response (fallback RAR).
  • the terminal device can send the hybrid automatic repeat request process (hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ) feedback information for the success RAR to the access network device, that is, the HARQ ACK. ; Among them, the HARQ ACK is used to notify the network device that the success RAR has been successfully decoded. If the access network device sends a fallback RAR to the terminal device, the terminal device can indicate the resource location of the PUSCH according to the fallback RAR, and then the terminal device can fall back to the four-step random access process and re-direct the connection through the PUSCH. The network access device sends uplink data.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • the communication method provided in this embodiment of the present application may include: a terminal device receiving first indication information from an access network device, where the first indication information indicates a first configured grant (configured grant, CG) in an inactive state , and further in the inactive state, the terminal device can use the first CG to send the first uplink information. In this way, the terminal device in the inactive state can use the CG to send the uplink information. Compared with the way of restoring the RRC connection and sending the uplink information or sending the uplink information during the random access process, the function of the uplink transmission can be effectively reduced. consumption and signaling overhead.
  • CG configured grant
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5 , the method may include S501 to S506, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of S501 to S506.
  • the access network device sends configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, and the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state. Accordingly, the terminal device may receive configuration information of one or more CGs.
  • the CG used by the terminal device to send the second uplink information in the connected state may be referred to as the CG in the connected state, such as the above one or more CGs; similarly, the CG used for the terminal device in the following
  • the CG in which the device sends the first uplink information in the inactive state is called the CG in the inactive state.
  • the uplink information (such as the first uplink information or the second uplink information, etc.) in the embodiment of the present application may include uplink data, but is not limited to include only uplink data.
  • the terminal device may establish an RRC connection with the access network device and enter a connected state.
  • the coverage of the access network device may include one or more cells, for example, the coverage of the access network device includes cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, cell 5, and cell 6.
  • the terminal device can work on a certain cell within the coverage of the access network device, that is, the terminal device communicates with the access network device on the cell.
  • the terminal device can also work in multiple cells (such as cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5) through carrier aggregation (CA), that is, the terminal device can work in multiple cells.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • carrier aggregation is to aggregate two or more carrier units (component carriers, CC) (also referred to as carriers) to support a larger transmission bandwidth, and each carrier unit can correspond to One cell, that is, one carrier unit is equivalent to one cell.
  • component carriers also referred to as carriers
  • the use of uplink resources by the terminal device may be dynamically scheduled or non-dynamically scheduled by the access network device.
  • the access network equipment can allocate uplink resources to the terminal equipment, and indicate the allocated uplink resources to the terminal equipment through downlink control information (DCI).
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the access network device can configure one or more CGs for the terminal device, and then the terminal device can send uplink information on the resources indicated by the CG.
  • the CG can include two types, namely type 1 (type 1) and type 2 (type 2).
  • type 1 the access network device may send the configuration information of the CG to the terminal device, and the configuration information of the CG may include the period of the resource, the time domain location and the frequency domain location of the resource, and the like. Unless the terminal device receives a release command, it can be considered that the resource occurs periodically.
  • the configuration information of the CG may also include a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) that matches the resource. In this way, when the terminal device uses the resource to send uplink information, the MCS that matches the resource can be used to pair the uplink.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the configuration information of the CG may also include one or more of the following parameters: open-loop power control related parameters, waveform, redundancy version, redundancy version sequence, repetition times, frequency hopping mode, resource allocation type, The number of HARQ processes, parameters related to demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the size of resource block group (RBG).
  • open-loop power control related parameters waveform, redundancy version, redundancy version sequence, repetition times, frequency hopping mode, resource allocation type, The number of HARQ processes, parameters related to demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the size of resource block group (RBG).
  • the access network device may send the configuration information of the CG to the terminal device, and the configuration information of the CG may include the period of the resource.
  • the configuration information of the CG may also include one or more of the following parameters: open-loop power control related parameters, waveform, redundancy version, redundancy version sequence, repetition times, frequency hopping mode, resource allocation type, DMRS related parameters and the number of HARQ processes.
  • the access network device may also send DCI to the terminal device to activate the resource.
  • the DCI may include one or more of the following parameters: the time domain location of the resource, the frequency domain location of the resource, and the MCS matching the resource.
  • the access network device may send the configuration information of the CG to the terminal device through an RRC message, which is not specifically limited.
  • the configuration information of the CG may also include other possible information, for example, may include the identifier of the CG, which is not specifically limited.
  • the connected state CG configured by the access network device for the terminal device may include a type 1 CG and/or a type 2 CG.
  • the access network device may configure multiple CGs for the terminal device.
  • the CG may be configured for a cell. If the CG in the connected state configured by the access network device for the terminal device includes multiple CGs, the multiple CGs may correspond to the same cell or may correspond to different cells.
  • CGs in the connected state include CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5, and the terminal equipment works on cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5, then CG1, CG2 can correspond to cell 1, and CG3 can Corresponding to cell 2, CG4 can correspond to cell 3, cell 4 has no CG, and CG5 can correspond to cell 5.
  • the resource sizes and time-frequency positions of the resources corresponding to the multiple CGs may be different.
  • the access network equipment can configure one downlink carrier and two uplink carriers for a cell to improve the uplink coverage capability of the system; wherein, the two uplink carriers are respectively: supplementary uplink (supplement uplink, SUL) carrier and normal uplink (normal uplink, NUL) carrier.
  • the CG may also be configured for the carrier, for example, the CG corresponding to a certain cell may be configured on the SUL carrier and/or the NUL carrier.
  • the CG corresponding to cell 1 includes CG1 and CG2, and cell 1 is configured with SUL carrier and NUL carrier, then CG1 can correspond to the SUL carrier (that is, the resource indicated by CG1 is located on the SUL carrier in the frequency domain), and CG2 can correspond to the NUL carrier.
  • the carrier that is, the resource indicated by CG2 is located on the NUL carrier in the frequency domain; or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to the SUL carrier; or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to the NUL carrier.
  • a carrier may include one or more BWPs, and in this case, the CG may also be configured for BWPs.
  • CG1 and CG2 both correspond to the NUL carrier of cell 1.
  • the NUL of cell 1 includes BWP1 and BWP2
  • CG1 can correspond to BWP1 (that is, the resource indicated by CG1 is located in BWP1 in the frequency domain)
  • CG2 can correspond to BWP2 ( That is, the resource indicated by CG2 is located in BWP2 in the frequency domain); or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to BWP1; or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to BWP2.
  • the access network device may configure a CG in the connected state for the terminal device, or may not configure the CG in the connected state for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device after receiving the configuration information of one or more CGs, if the terminal device needs to send the second uplink information in the connected state, it can use one of the CGs to send the second uplink information.
  • the terminal device sends request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state; correspondingly, the access network device may receive the request information.
  • situation 1 there may be multiple situations in which the terminal device sends the request information to the access network device. Two possible situations are described below, namely situation 1 and situation 2.
  • the terminal device may send request information to the access network device when it is in the connected state.
  • the terminal device may send request information to the access network device before or after receiving the CG in the connected state configured by the access network device for the terminal device.
  • the request information may be a newly designed message dedicated to requesting a CG in an inactive state.
  • the request information may also be information carried in a certain message (the specific message is not limited); for example, the request information may include at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG ; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  • the candidate CG may include at least one CG among the CGs in the connected state; the first uplink information may be understood as uplink information that the terminal device wants to send in the inactive state.
  • the request information when the request information includes the identity of the candidate CG (such as CG1) and the identity of the cell (such as cell 1) corresponding to the candidate CG, it indicates that the terminal device wants to use the CG1 corresponding to cell 1 to send the first uplink information in the inactive state;
  • the request information includes the identity of the cell (eg, cell 1) (but not the identity of the candidate CG)
  • the terminal device wants to use all CGs corresponding to cell 1 to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the access network device can configure an inactive CG for the terminal device in a targeted manner.
  • the terminal device may send request information to the access network device when it is in an inactive state.
  • the access network device sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device can receive the RRC connection release message and enter the inactive state; further, after the terminal device enters the inactive state, if it needs to send the first uplink information, the inactive camping cell (such as the first cell) can be determined, and camping in the first cell, and then sending request information to the access network device on the first cell.
  • the inactive camping cell such as the first cell
  • the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state, which can be understood as the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell.
  • the request information may be a first message
  • the first message is a message used for a random access procedure, for example, the first message is the third message in the four-step random access procedure or the third message in the two-step random access procedure.
  • the message A that is to say, the terminal device implicitly requests the CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell by sending the third message or the message A.
  • the request information may also be information carried in the first message (such as the third message in the four-step random access procedure or the message A in the two-step random access procedure); for example, the request information may include at least one of the following Item: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG, the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG, and the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  • the first cell includes connected CGs, such as CG1, CG2, and CG3, and the candidate CGs may include at least one CG among CG1, CG2, and CG3.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device camps on the first cell, it can first determine whether the first cell includes a CG in an inactive state, and if it does not include a CG in an inactive state, it can send a request to the access network device If the information includes an inactive CG, the inactive CG may be used to send the first uplink information.
  • the inactive CG included in the first cell may be configured by the access network device through the implementation mode 1 in S503, that is, the situation 1 in S502 (corresponding to the implementation mode 1 in S503) and the situation 2 (corresponding to the implementation mode 2 in S503 ) may be solutions implemented independently, or the two may also be implemented in combination.
  • a possible scenario is that the access network device configures the terminal device with an inactive CG (corresponding to the second cell) through the RRC connection release message, and when the terminal device enters the inactive state, When camping on the first cell (the first cell does not have a CG in an inactive state), the access network device may request a CG in an inactive state corresponding to the first cell.
  • the terminal device may send request information to the access network device, and then the access network device may configure an inactive CG for the terminal device according to the request information; or, the terminal device The device may also not send request information to the access network device.
  • the access network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information indicates an inactive CG (eg, the first CG); correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates an inactive CG (eg, the first CG); correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • implementation manner 1 there may be multiple manners for the access network device to send the first indication information to the terminal device, and two possible implementation manners are described below, namely implementation manner 1 and implementation manner 2.
  • the access network device may send an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, where the RRC connection release message includes the first indication information.
  • the access network device may select some or all of the CGs in the connected state as the CGs in the inactive state. That is, the CG in the inactive state may belong to the CG in the connected state.
  • the CG in the connected state includes CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5, and the CG in the inactive state may include CG1 and CG2.
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following: the identity of CG1; the identity of the cell corresponding to CG1; the identity of the BWP corresponding to CG1; the uplink carrier corresponding to CG1 's identification.
  • the uplink carrier corresponding to CG1 may be a SUL carrier or a NUL carrier.
  • the first indication information when the first indication information includes the identity of the CG1 and the identity of the cell corresponding to the CG1 (eg, the cell 1), it indicates that the CG1 corresponding to the cell 1 can be used to send uplink information in an inactive state.
  • the first indication information includes the identity of at least one cell (such as cell 1) (but does not include the identity of the CG), it indicates the CG corresponding to cell 1 (that is, the CG on cell 1 configured for the terminal device in S502 above, such as Both CG1 and CG2) can be used to send uplink information in an inactive state.
  • the CG corresponding to the BWP1 can be used for both Send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the first indication information may include 1 bit, if the value of the bit is 1, it means that all CGs in the connected state can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state; or, if the value of this bit is 1, it means that some or all of the CGs in the connected state can be used in the inactive state.
  • the uplink information is sent in the state of the Indicates which CGs can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the value of this bit is 0, it can indicate that none of the CGs in the connected state can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the access network device may refer to the request information, and select some or all CGs from the CGs in the connected state as non-contact CGs. Active CG.
  • the CG in the inactive state determined by the access network device may have an intersection with the candidate CG requested by the request information; for example, the candidate CGs include CG1, CG2 and CG3, and the inactive state determined by the access network device
  • the candidate CGs include CG1 and CG2
  • the inactive CGs determined by the access network device include CG1, CG2, and CG3
  • the candidate CGs include CG1 and CG2, and then The inactive CG determined by the network access device also includes CG1 and CG2.
  • the inactive CG determined by the access network device may have no intersection with the candidate CG requested by the request information (that is, the two are completely different); for example, the candidate CG includes CG1 and CG2, and the access network
  • the CGs in the inactive state determined by the device include CG3 and CG4.
  • the access network device may newly configure an inactive CG for the terminal device.
  • the CG in the inactive state may be different from the CG in the connected state.
  • the CGs in the connected state include CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5, and the CGs in the inactive state include CG6 and CG7.
  • the first indication information may include configuration information of CG6.
  • the first indication information may also include at least one of the following: the identity of the cell corresponding to CG6; the identity of the BWP corresponding to CG6; the identity of the uplink carrier corresponding to CG6, and the uplink carrier corresponding to CG6 may be a SUL carrier or a NUL carrier.
  • the first indication information and the configuration information of the CG in the connected state may be carried in the same message; that is, when the access network device configures the CG in the connected state for the terminal device, Indicate which CGs in the connected state can be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state, or the access network device can configure the connected state CGs (such as CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5) for the terminal device at the same time. and inactive CGs (eg CG6, CG7).
  • the first indication information includes multiple pieces of information
  • the multiple pieces of information may be carried in the same message, or may also be carried in different messages, which is not specifically limited.
  • the first indication information may be carried in the second message, and the second message is a message used for the random access process, for example, in the four-step random access process The fourth message or message B in the two-step random access procedure.
  • the access network device may select some or all of the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell as the CGs in the inactive state.
  • the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell include CG1, CG2, and CG3, and the access network device may select at least one CG from CG1, CG2, and CG3 as the CG corresponding to the inactive state.
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following: an identifier of CG1; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to CG1; and an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to CG1.
  • the first indication information may include 1 bit. If the value is 1, it means that all CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state; or, if the value of this bit is 1, it means that the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell can be used to send uplink information.
  • the first indication information may also include at least one of the following: the identifier of the CG, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the CG, and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the CG. identifier to further indicate which CGs can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state. In addition, if the value of this bit is 0, it can indicate that none of the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the access network device may send a fourth message or message B (successRAR) to implicitly indicate that all CGs in the connected state of the first cell can be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state; or , the access network device can implicitly indicate that the CG in the connected state of the first cell can be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state by sending a fourth message or message B (successRAR); further, the fourth message Or the message B (successRAR) may further include the identifier of the CG, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the CG, and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the CG, so as to further indicate which CGs can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • a fourth message or message B successRAR
  • the fourth message or message B (successRAR) involved in the implementation manner 2 may be an RRC connection release message, so as to instruct the terminal device to continue to stay in the inactive state.
  • the access network device may refer to the request information and select a part from the CG in the connected state corresponding to the first cell or all CGs as inactive CGs.
  • the access network device may newly configure a CG in an inactive state corresponding to the first cell for the terminal device.
  • the CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell may be different from the CG in the connected state.
  • the first indication information may include configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information may further include at least one of the following items: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG.
  • the terminal device in the inactive state, the terminal device sends the first uplink information by using the CG in the inactive state.
  • the terminal device in the inactive state, if the terminal device needs to send the first uplink information, it can determine the camping cell in the inactive state, for example, if the camping cell is determined to be cell 1, it can camp on cell 1. Further, the terminal device can determine whether the cell 1 includes the CG in the inactive state, and if the cell 1 includes the CG in the inactive state, the first uplink information can be sent by using the CG in the inactive state.
  • the terminal device can use the method described above to send uplink information (such as restoring the RRC connection for uplink transmission or performing uplink transmission in the random access process); for example, if the terminal device is in the The first uplink information is sent during the random access process (that is, the RRC connection is not restored, and it is still in an inactive state). Further, if the terminal device moves and camps on cell 2, if cell 2 includes a CG in the inactive state, then The terminal device may use the inactive CG in cell 2 to send the first uplink information.
  • uplink information such as restoring the RRC connection for uplink transmission or performing uplink transmission in the random access process
  • the terminal device can also determine whether the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid, and if the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid, it can use the inactive CG to send the Uplink information; if the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is invalid, the method described above can be used to send the uplink information.
  • the terminal device can determine whether the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid. For example, if the terminal device determines that the timing advance timer corresponding to cell 1 is running, it can determine that the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid.
  • sending the first uplink information by the terminal device using the inactive CG may include: the terminal device using the resources indicated by the CG to send the first uplink information, optionally, it may further include: the terminal device using the resources indicated by the CG to send the first uplink information.
  • the MCS performs coding and modulation processing on the first uplink information.
  • the terminal device sends an RRC connection recovery request message to the access network device.
  • the terminal device may send an RRC connection restoration request message to the access network device.
  • the terminal device may send an RRC connection restoration request message to the access network device.
  • the terminal device may receive a paging message in an inactive state, or other possible situations, which are not specifically limited.
  • the access network device sends an RRC connection recovery message to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send an RRC connection restoration message to the terminal device if it is determined to restore the RRC connection of the terminal device.
  • the access network device may also send second indication information to the terminal device, and the second indication information indicates the inactive CG. It can also be used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, or the second indication information indicates that the CG in the inactive state is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the second indication information may be carried in the RRC connection recovery message, or may also be carried in other possible messages, which is not specifically limited.
  • the second indication information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message, or may also be carried in a different message, which is not specifically limited.
  • the access network device can indicate to the terminal device which CGs in the connected state can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state, or reconfigure the terminal device with the inactive CG for use in the non-active state.
  • the uplink information is sent in the active state, so that the terminal device can also use the CG to send the uplink information in the inactive state, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of uplink transmission.
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include: the terminal device receives indication information from the access network device, the indication information indicates the corresponding first cell in the inactive state, and the terminal device may be in the inactive state down, camp on the first cell.
  • the terminal device since the access network device indicates the first cell to the terminal device, the terminal device can camp on the first cell in the inactive state without performing cell measurement and cell selection or reselection process operations, thereby The processing burden of the terminal device can be effectively reduced, and the power of the terminal device can be saved.
  • the access network device configures the terminal device with a CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell, if the subsequent terminal device is in the inactive state, it will camp in the second cell. , and the second cell does not include the CG in the inactive state, so that the terminal device cannot effectively use the CG in the inactive state to send uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the cell indicated by the above indication information may include a CG in an inactive state, so that the terminal device can try to camp on a cell with a CG in the inactive state, so as to facilitate subsequent use of the inactive CG in the inactive state
  • the CG in the inactive state sends the first uplink information to improve the utilization rate of the CG in the inactive state, so as to utilize the resources more effectively.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6 , the method may include S601 to S604, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of S601 to S604.
  • the access network device sends indication information to the terminal device, where the indication information indicates the cell corresponding to the inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the indication information.
  • the cell corresponding to the inactive state indicated by the indication information can be understood as a cell that the terminal device can preferentially camp on in the inactive state.
  • the cell corresponding to the inactive state may include at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell.
  • implementation manner 1 There may be various manners in which the indication information indicates a cell in an inactive state, and two possible implementation manners are described below, namely implementation manner 1 and implementation manner 2.
  • the indication information may indicate the cell corresponding to the inactive state in an explicit manner.
  • the indication information may indicate a cell (such as the first cell) corresponding to the inactive state, or may indicate multiple cells corresponding to the inactive state. A detailed description.
  • the indication information indicates a cell (such as the first cell) corresponding to the inactive state, and the first cell includes the CG in the inactive state.
  • the indication information may include the identity of the first cell.
  • the indication information may further include the indication information and at least one of the following items: an identifier of the first CG, an identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG The identifier, the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG; in this case, the first CG may belong to the CG in the connected state.
  • the indication information may further include configuration information of the first CG, optionally, the indication information may further include at least one of the following: an identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG .
  • the first CG may be a newly configured CG different from the connected state.
  • the indication information indicates multiple cells corresponding to the inactive state, the multiple cells include the first cell, and each of the multiple cells may include a CG in the inactive state; multiple cells can be understood as candidates stay in the area.
  • the indication information may include identities of multiple cells.
  • the indication information may further include at least one of the following: the first CG The identifier of the first CG, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG, and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG; in another example, the indication information may also include the configuration information of the first CG, optionally, the indication information may also include the following At least one item: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG.
  • the indication information may indicate the cell corresponding to the inactive state in an implicit manner.
  • the indication information may indicate an inactive CG.
  • the cell corresponding to the inactive state may be a cell corresponding to the inactive CG indicated by the indication information.
  • the related implementation of the CG in which the indication information indicates the inactive state may refer to the description in the first embodiment.
  • the access network device may send the indication information to the terminal device in various manners, for example, the access network device sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, and the RRC connection release message includes the indication information.
  • the indication information in the second embodiment and the first indication information in the first embodiment may be the same information.
  • the terminal device camps on the first cell in the inactive state according to the indication information.
  • the terminal device may camp on the first cell after the first cell satisfies the camping condition. If the indication information indicates multiple cells corresponding to the inactive state, the terminal device can select a cell (such as the first cell) that satisfies the camping condition from the multiple cells (ie, candidate camping cells) as the camping cell, and then camp on stay in the first district.
  • the terminal device may select the first cell with the best cell quality or the first cell with the signal quality greater than a preset threshold according to the cell quality of the multiple cells. first district.
  • the cell quality of the first cell may be obtained by the terminal device by measuring the signal sent by the access network device in the cell, and the cell quality may include reference signal receiving power (reference signal receiving power, At least one of RSRP), reference signal receiving quality (reference signal receiving quality, RSRQ), and signal to noise ratio (signal to interference plus noise ratio, SINR).
  • reference signal receiving power reference signal receiving power, At least one of RSRP
  • reference signal receiving quality reference signal receiving quality
  • SINR signal to noise ratio
  • the terminal device After determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition, the terminal device performs relaxation measurement on the first cell.
  • the terminal device determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition includes: determining that the cell quality of the first cell is greater than or equal to a first threshold; or, determining that the cell quality of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold within the first time period. equal to the first threshold.
  • the terminal device performs relaxation measurement on the first cell, which may include at least one of the following: do not measure the intra-frequency cell of the first cell; do not measure the inter-frequency cell of the first cell; do not perform cell reselection; choose.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell reselection process after camping on the first cell and staying for an appropriate time (for example, 1 s).
  • the cell reselection can be divided into intra-frequency cell reselection and inter-frequency cell reselection (ie, cell reselection between different radio access technologies (RATs)). That is, the terminal device may measure the intra-frequency cell of the first cell and/or the inter-frequency cell of the first cell, and then perform cell reselection to camp on another cell (eg, the second cell) according to the measurement result.
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • the terminal device may perform relaxed measurement on the first cell, that is, try not to change the camping cell as much as possible, so as to ensure that the terminal device can use the inactive.
  • the CG in the state can send uplink information, and it can also reduce the processing burden of the terminal device and save the power of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determining that the first cell meets the second preset condition includes at least one of the following: (1) determining that the cell quality of the first cell is less than a second threshold; (2) determining that the first cell is within the second time period The cell quality of the cell is less than the second threshold; (3) it is determined that the number of consecutive failures of using the first CG to send uplink information is greater than or equal to the third threshold; (4) it is determined that the number of consecutive failures to initiate random access in the first cell is greater than or equal to Fourth threshold.
  • terminating the relaxed measurement of the first cell by the terminal device may include at least one of the following: measuring an intra-frequency cell of the first cell; measuring an inter-frequency cell of the first cell; performing cell reselection; and performing cell selection.
  • the terminal device determines that the first cell complies with (1) and/or (2), it means that the cell quality of the first cell is poor, and if it continues to camp in the first cell Using an inactive CG to send uplink information may cause uplink information transmission failure, so the relaxation measurement on the first cell can be terminated so as to perform cell selection or cell reselection and camp on other suitable cells.
  • the terminal device when it resides on the first cell, if it needs to send uplink information, it can send the uplink information through the CG corresponding to the inactive state, and after sending the uplink information, The terminal device can determine whether the uplink information is sent successfully according to the feedback information of the access network device. If the feedback information is not received within the preset time period or the received feedback information indicates that the transmission of uplink information fails, the terminal device can continue to use the The CG corresponding to the active state sends uplink information.
  • the relaxation measurement on the first cell can be terminated, so as to perform cell selection or cell reselection to settle. to other suitable cells.
  • the relaxation measurement on the first cell may be terminated, so as to perform cell selection or cell reselection and camp on other suitable cells.
  • the above-mentioned related parameters of relaxation measurement can be determined by The protocol is pre-defined, or it can be configured by the access network device for the terminal device, or some of the parameters in the above parameters are pre-defined by the protocol, and some parameters are configured by the access network device for the terminal device. Implementation is not limited.
  • the communication between the terminal device and the access network device is mainly described as an example, and the methods in the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to a dual-connection scenario.
  • a terminal device can be connected to two access network devices at the same time, one of the two access network devices is the primary access network device, and the other access network device is the secondary access network device equipment.
  • the access network device involved in the first embodiment or the second embodiment may be the primary access network device, that is, the primary access network device may execute the first and second embodiments above
  • the operations of the access network equipment involved in the second step such as configuring the CG in the inactive state for the terminal device, configuring the cell corresponding to the inactive state for the terminal device, and configuring the relevant parameters of the relaxation measurement for the terminal device (such as the first threshold, the first the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold, the duration of the first time period, the duration of the second time period); or, the access involved in the first and second embodiments may also be performed by the secondary network device.
  • the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 may include: the first access network device receives first indication information from the second access network device, the first indication information indicates the first CG in an inactive state, the first The CG is used for the terminal device to send uplink information in an inactive state; furthermore, the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may establish dual connections with the first access network device and the second access network device, the first access network device may be the primary access network device, and the second access network device may be the secondary access network device or, the first access network device may be a secondary access network device, and the second access network device may be a primary access network device.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7 , the method may include S701 to S705, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of S701 to S705.
  • the first access network device sends request information to the second access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state; correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the request information.
  • the first access network device sends the request information to the second access network device.
  • the load of the first access network device is heavy, the terminal device cannot be allocated an inactive state.
  • the request information may be sent to the second access network device; for another example, if the cells within the coverage of the first access network device do not support the inactive CG, the request information may be sent to the second access network device .
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data (that is, the uplink data) that is expected to arrive at the terminal device; the size of the data that is expected to arrive at the terminal device (that is, the data volume of the uplink data). ); information on the arrival time of the data expected to arrive at the terminal device.
  • the request information may also include other possible information, which is not specifically limited.
  • the first access network device may determine the above-mentioned content included in the request information in various ways. For example, the first access network device may estimate the data transmission information according to the historical data transmission information communicated with the terminal device. In the inactive state, the transmission period, data volume, arrival time information, etc. of the data expected to arrive at the terminal device.
  • the second access network device sends the first information to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the first information.
  • the first access network device sends the first information to the terminal device.
  • the first information may include at least one of the following: indication information 1, indication information 2, and related parameters of relaxation measurement.
  • the indication information 1 indicates the CG in the inactive state, and the CG in the inactive state is used by the terminal device to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
  • the indication information 1 please refer to the first indication information in the first embodiment. Description, details will not be repeated.
  • the cell corresponding to the inactive CG indicated by the indication information 1 is a cell within the coverage of the second access network device.
  • the indication information 2 indicates the cell corresponding to the inactive state.
  • the cell corresponding to the inactive state indicated by the indication information 2 is a cell within the coverage of the second access network device.
  • Relevant parameters of relaxation measurement may include a first threshold, a second threshold, a third threshold, a fourth threshold, the duration of the first time period, and the duration of the second time period. For the meaning of each parameter, refer to the description in Embodiment 2.
  • the terminal device may perform corresponding operations according to the first information.
  • the CG in the inactive state may be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
  • camping on the cell corresponding to the inactive state (such as the first cell) in the inactive state, or, for example, according to the relevant parameters of the relaxation measurement perform the relaxation measurement on the first cell and terminate the measurement of the first cell. Relax measurement.
  • Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2 which will not be repeated here.
  • the second access network device sends the indication information 3 to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the indication information 3 .
  • the second access network device may also send indication information 3 to the first access network device, the indication information 3
  • the CG indicating the inactive state can also be used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, or the indication information 3 indicates that the CG in the inactive state is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the indication information 3 For the related implementation of the indication information 3, reference may be made to the description about the second indication information in the first embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
  • the first access network device sends indication information 3 to the terminal device.
  • the secondary access network device can indicate to the terminal device which CGs in the connected state can be used for sending uplink information in the inactive state, or reconfigure the terminal device with CGs in the inactive state for sending in the inactive state.
  • Uplink information so that in the inactive state, the terminal equipment can also use the CG to send uplink information when camping on a cell within the coverage of the secondary access network equipment, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of uplink transmission.
  • first and second embodiments can be implemented separately, or can also be implemented in combination.
  • the indication information in the second embodiment and the first indication in the first embodiment may be the same information, or may be different information, which is not specifically limited.
  • step numbers of the flowcharts described in Embodiments 1 to 3 are only an example of the execution flow, and do not constitute a restriction on the sequence of execution of the steps, and there is no timing dependency between the embodiments of this application. There is no strict order of execution between the steps of a relationship.
  • steps shown in each flowchart are steps that must be executed, and some steps may be added or deleted on the basis of each flowchart according to actual needs.
  • the access network device or the terminal device may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the access network device or the terminal device may be divided into functional units according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional unit may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • FIG. 8 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of the apparatus involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 800 may include: a processing unit 802 and a communication unit 803 .
  • the processing unit 802 is used to control and manage the actions of the device 800 .
  • the communication unit 803 is used to support the communication between the apparatus 800 and other devices.
  • the communication unit 803 is also referred to as a transceiving unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, which are respectively configured to perform receiving and sending operations.
  • the apparatus 800 may further include a storage unit 801 for storing program codes and/or data of the apparatus 800 .
  • the apparatus 800 may be the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment, or may also be a chip provided in the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 802 may support the apparatus 800 to perform the actions of the terminal device in the above method examples.
  • the processing unit 802 mainly performs the internal actions of the terminal device in the method example, and the communication unit 803 may support the communication between the apparatus 800 and other devices.
  • the communication unit 803 is configured to: receive first indication information from the access network device, where the first indication information indicates the first CG in the inactive state; and, in the inactive state, use the first indication information A CG sends the first uplink information.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG
  • the identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in the connected state; Wherein, the first CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  • the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG,
  • the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are configured to send the second uplink in the connected state information; wherein the first CG is different from the one or more CGs.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is also used to enter the terminal device from an inactive state After the connected state, the second uplink information is sent, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is the normal uplink carrier or the supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  • the candidate CG includes the first CG.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are configured to send the second uplink in the connected state information; wherein the candidate CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  • the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
  • the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
  • the apparatus 800 may be the access network device in the foregoing embodiment, or may also be a chip set in the access network device.
  • the processing unit 802 may support the apparatus 800 to perform the actions of the access network device in each method example above.
  • the processing unit 802 mainly performs the internal actions of the access network device in the method example, and the communication unit 803 may support the communication between the apparatus 800 and other devices.
  • the processing unit 802 is configured to: acquire first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a first CG in an inactive state, and the first CG is used by the terminal device to send the first uplink in an inactive state information; the communication unit 803 is configured to: send the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG
  • the identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used for the terminal device to send the second Uplink information; the first CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  • the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the first CG
  • the corresponding uplink carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used for the terminal device to send the second Uplink information; wherein the first CG is different from the one or more CGs.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to be used after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state , the second uplink information is sent, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  • the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
  • the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG;
  • the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is the normal uplink carrier or the supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  • the candidate CG includes the first CG.
  • the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in the connected state;
  • the candidate CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  • the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
  • the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
  • each unit in the above apparatus can be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element; also can all be realized in the form of hardware; some units can also be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element, and some units can be realized in the form of hardware.
  • each unit can be a separately established processing element, or can be integrated in a certain chip of the device to be implemented, and can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, which can be called by a certain processing element of the device and execute the unit's processing.
  • each operation of the above method or each of the above units may be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or implemented in the form of software being invoked by the processing element.
  • a unit in any of the above apparatuses may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, eg, one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or, one or more Multiple microprocessors (digital singnal processors, DSPs), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • DSPs digital singnal processors
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • a unit in the apparatus can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler
  • the processing element can be a processor, such as a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), or other processors that can invoke programs.
  • these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • SOC system-on-a-chip
  • the above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices.
  • the receiving unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
  • the above unit for sending is an interface circuit of the device for sending signals to other devices.
  • the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may be the terminal device in the above embodiment, and is used to implement operations of the terminal device in the above embodiment.
  • the terminal device includes: an antenna 910 , a radio frequency part 920 , and a signal processing part 930 .
  • the antenna 910 is connected to the radio frequency part 920 .
  • the radio frequency part 920 receives the information sent by the network device through the antenna 910, and sends the information sent by the network device to the signal processing part 930 for processing.
  • the signal processing part 930 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the radio frequency part 920
  • the radio frequency part 920 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the network equipment through the antenna 910 .
  • the signal processing part 930 can include a modulation and demodulation subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data; it can also include a central processing subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of the terminal device operating system and the application layer; in addition, it can also Including other subsystems, such as multimedia subsystem, peripheral subsystem, etc., wherein the multimedia subsystem is used to realize the control of the terminal equipment camera, screen display, etc., and the peripheral subsystem is used to realize the connection with other devices.
  • the modem subsystem can be a separate chip.
  • the modem subsystem may include one or more processing elements 931, including, for example, a host CPU and other integrated circuits.
  • the modulation and demodulation subsystem may also include a storage element 932 and an interface circuit 933 .
  • the storage element 932 is used to store data and programs, but the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may not be stored in the storage element 932, but in a memory outside the modulation and demodulation subsystem, When used, the modem subsystem is loaded for use.
  • Interface circuit 933 is used to communicate with other subsystems.
  • the modulation and demodulation subsystem can be implemented by a chip, the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to execute each step of any one of the methods performed by the above terminal equipment, and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices.
  • the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler.
  • an apparatus for a terminal device includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the program stored in the storage element to Execute the method executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the storage element may be a storage element in which the processing element is on the same chip, that is, an on-chip storage element.
  • the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may be in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element.
  • the processing element calls or loads the program from the off-chip storage element to the on-chip storage element, so as to call and execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are provided on the modulation and demodulation subsystem, and the processing element here may be an integrated circuit, For example: one or more ASICs, or, one or more DSPs, or, one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form chips.
  • the units of the terminal device implementing each step in the above method may be integrated together and implemented in the form of an SOC, and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method.
  • At least one processing element and a storage element may be integrated in the chip, and the method executed by the above terminal device may be implemented in the form of a program stored in the storage element being invoked by the processing element; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated in the chip to implement the above terminal.
  • the above apparatus for a terminal device may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, where the at least one processing element is configured to execute any method performed by the terminal device provided in the above method embodiments.
  • the processing element can execute part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device in the first way: by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: by combining the instructions with the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element Part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may be performed in the manner of the first method; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may also be performed in combination with the first manner and the second manner.
  • the processing elements here are the same as those described above, and can be implemented by a processor, and the functions of the processing elements can be the same as those of the processing unit described in FIG. 8 .
  • the processing element may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, or may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as: one or more ASICs, or, one or more microprocessors, DSPs , or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • the storage element may be implemented by a memory, and the function of the storage element may be the same as that of the storage unit described in FIG. 8 .
  • the storage element may be implemented by a memory, and the function of the storage element may be the same as that of the storage unit described in FIG. 8 .
  • the storage element can be one memory or a collective term for multiple memories.
  • the terminal device shown in FIG. 9 can implement each process involving the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device shown in FIG. 9 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • Access network device 100 may include one or more DUs 1001 and one or more CUs 1002.
  • the DU 1001 may include at least one antenna 10011, at least one radio frequency unit 10012, at least one processor 10013 and at least one memory 10014.
  • the DU 1001 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals, the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of baseband processing.
  • the CU 1002 may include at least one processor 10022 and at least one memory 10021 .
  • the CU 1002 part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control access network equipment, and the like.
  • the DU 1001 and the CU 1002 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the CU 1002 is the control center of the access network equipment, which can also be called a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete the baseband processing function.
  • the CU 1002 may be used to control the access network device to perform the operation process of the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the access network device 100 may include one or more radio frequency units, one or more DUs, and one or more CUs.
  • the DU may include at least one processor 10013 and at least one memory 10014
  • the radio unit may include at least one antenna 10011 and at least one radio frequency unit 10012
  • the CU may include at least one processor 10022 and at least one memory 10021 .
  • the CU1002 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or may respectively support wireless access systems of different access standards.
  • Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the memory 10021 and the processor 10022 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
  • the DU1001 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or can support a wireless access network with different access standards (such as a 5G network). LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the memory 10014 and processor 10013 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
  • the access network device shown in FIG. 10 can implement each process involving the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the access network device shown in FIG. 10 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • And/or which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • At least one of A, B and C includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
  • computer-usable storage media including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications. Disclosed are a communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: a terminal device receiving first indication information from an access network device, wherein the first indication information indicates a first CG of an inactive state; and the terminal device then transmitting, in the inactive state, first uplink information using the first CG. By using this manner, the terminal device in the inactive state may transmit uplink information using a CG. Comparing said manner with a manner in which uplink information is sent by resuming an RRC connection or the uplink information is sent during a random access process, the power consumption and signaling overheads of uplink transmission can be effectively reduced.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
在第五代(the 5th generation,5G)通信系统中,终端设备存在三种无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)状态,分别为RRC连接(RRC-connected)态、RRC空闲(RRC-idle)态和RRC非激活(inactive)态。In the 5th generation (5G) communication system, there are three radio resource control (RRC) states for terminal equipment, which are RRC-connected state and RRC-idle state. state and RRC inactive state.
其中,连接态的终端设备可以和接入网设备进行数据传输,而非激活态的终端设备想要与接入网设备进行数据传输时,需要先完成多次信息交互以进入连接态。也就是说,非激活态的终端设备需要先进入连接态,进而与接入网设备进行数据传输。采用该种方式,会导致不必要的功耗和信令开销。Wherein, the terminal device in the connected state can perform data transmission with the access network device, and when the terminal device in the inactive state wants to perform data transmission with the access network device, it needs to complete multiple information exchanges to enter the connected state. That is to say, the terminal device in the inactive state needs to enter the connected state first, and then perform data transmission with the access network device. In this way, unnecessary power consumption and signaling overhead will be caused.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
有鉴于此,本申请提供了一种通信方法及装置,用于实现终端设备在非激活态下进行上行传输,降低上行传输的功耗和信令开销。In view of this, the present application provides a communication method and apparatus, which are used to implement uplink transmission of a terminal device in an inactive state and reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of uplink transmission.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于终端设备,或者也可以应用于终端设备中的芯片。以该方法应用于终端设备为例,在该方法中,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一配置授权CG;以及,在非激活态下,使用第一CG发送第一上行信息。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a terminal device, or can also be applied to a chip in the terminal device. Taking the method applied to a terminal device as an example, in this method, the terminal device receives first indication information from the access network device, and the first indication information indicates the first configuration authorization CG in the inactive state; and, in the inactive state Next, use the first CG to send the first uplink information.
采用该种方式,非激活态的终端设备可以使用CG来发送上行信息,相比于恢复RRC连接发送上行信息或者在随机接入过程中发送上行信息的方式来说,能够有效降低上行传输的功耗和信令开销。In this way, the terminal device in the inactive state can use the CG to send the uplink information. Compared with the way of restoring the RRC connection and sending the uplink information or sending the uplink information during the random access process, the function of the uplink transmission can be effectively reduced. consumption and signaling overhead.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG The identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,第一CG属于一个或多个CG(或者说一个或多个CG包括第一CG)。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the first A CG belongs to one or more CGs (or one or more CGs include the first CG).
采用该种方式,接入网设备可以从为终端设备分配的连接态的CG中,确定出一些CG,用于终端设备在非激活态下发送上行信息。In this manner, the access network device can determine some CGs from the CGs in the connected state allocated to the terminal device, for the terminal device to send uplink information in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, The uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,第一CG不同于一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the first CG is different from one or more CGs.
采用该种方式,接入网设备可以为终端设备配置新的CG,用于终端设备在非激活态 下发送上行信息。In this way, the access network device can configure a new CG for the terminal device for the terminal device to send uplink information in an inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自接入网设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to send the first CG after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state. The second uplink information, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,第二指示信息承载于RRC连接恢复消息。In a possible design, the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
在一种可能的设计中,在非激活态下,使用第一CG发送第一上行信息之前,还包括:确定第一CG对应的小区的定时提前TA值有效。In a possible design, in the inactive state, before using the first CG to send the first uplink information, the method further includes: determining that the timing advance TA value of the cell corresponding to the first CG is valid.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向接入网设备发送请求信息,请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,请求信息包括以下至少一项:非激活态的候选CG的标识;候选CG对应的小区的标识;候选CG对应的BWP的标识;候选CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波;第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG, The uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
采用该种方式,由于请求信息中可以包括上述至少一项,从而使得接入网设备可以参考请求信息,更有针对性地为终端设备配置非激活态的CG。In this manner, since the request information may include at least one of the above items, the access network device can refer to the request information and configure the terminal device with an inactive CG in a more targeted manner.
在一种可能的设计中,候选CG包括第一CG。In one possible design, the candidate CGs include the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,候选CG属于一个或多个CG(或者说一个或多个CG包括候选CG)。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the candidate CGs are Belong to one or more CGs (or one or more CGs include candidate CGs).
在一种可能的设计中,请求信息承载于第一消息,第一消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the request information is carried in the first message, and the first message is used for the random access procedure.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息,或者,第一指示信息承载于第二消息,第二消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于第一接入网设备,或者也可以应用于第一接入网设备中的芯片。以该方法应用于第一接入网设备为例,在该方法中,第一接入网设备获取第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG,第一CG用于终端设备在非激活态下发送第一上行信息;以及,向终端设备发送第一指示信息。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a first access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in the first access network device. Taking the method applied to the first access network device as an example, in this method, the first access network device obtains first indication information, the first indication information indicates the first CG in an inactive state, and the first CG is used for the terminal The device sends the first uplink information in the inactive state; and sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG The identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息;第一CG属于所述一个或多个CG(或者说,一个或多个CG包括第一CG)。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used by the terminal device to send the second uplink information in a connected state; the first CG belonging to the one or more CGs (or in other words, the one or more CGs include the first CG).
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the first CG The corresponding uplink carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,第一CG不同于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used by the terminal device to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the first A CG is different from the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is also used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state , or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,第二指示信息承载于RRC连接恢复消息。In a possible design, the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求所述非激活态的CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving request information from a terminal device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:所述非激活态的候选CG的标识;所述候选CG对应的小区的标识;所述候选CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波;第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is the normal uplink carrier or the supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述候选CG包括第一CG。In one possible design, the candidate CG includes the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,所述候选CG属于所述一个或多个CG(或者说所述一个或多个CG包括所述候选CG)。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state; wherein the candidate The CG belongs to the one or more CGs (or the one or more CGs include the candidate CG).
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息承载于第一消息,第一消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息,或者,第一指示信息承载于第二消息,第二消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
在一种可能的设计中,获取第一指示信息,包括:接收来自第二接入网设备的第一指示信息;其中,第一接入网设备为终端设备的主接入网设备,第二接入网设备为终端设备的辅接入网设备。In a possible design, acquiring the first indication information includes: receiving the first indication information from the second access network device; wherein the first access network device is the primary access network device of the terminal device, and the second access network device is the primary access network device of the terminal device. The access network equipment is the auxiliary access network equipment of the terminal equipment.
在一种可能的设计中,向第二接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG。In a possible design, request information is sent to the second access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:在非激活态下,预计将要到达的数据的传输周期;所述预计将要到达的数据的大小;所述预计将要到达的数据的到达时间信息。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data expected to arrive; the size of the data expected to arrive; the data expected to arrive arrival time information.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二接入网设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the second access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to, after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, The second uplink information is sent, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
需要说明的是,上述第二方面所描述的方法与第一方面所描述的方法相对应,第二方面所描述的方法中相关技术特征的有益效果可以参见第一方面的描述,具体不再赘述。It should be noted that the method described in the second aspect above corresponds to the method described in the first aspect. For the beneficial effects of the related technical features in the method described in the second aspect, reference may be made to the description of the first aspect, and details are not repeated here. .
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于终端设备,或者也可以应用于终端设备中的芯片。以该方法应用于终端设备为例,在该方法中,接收来自接入网设备的指示信息,所述指示信息指示非激活态对应的第一小区;以及,在所述非激活态下,驻留在第一小区。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a terminal device, or can also be applied to a chip in the terminal device. Taking the method applied to a terminal device as an example, in the method, indication information from an access network device is received, the indication information indicates the first cell corresponding to the inactive state; stay in the first district.
采用该种方式,由于接入网设备向终端设备指示了第一小区,从而终端设备在非激活态下可以驻留在第一小区,而无需执行小区测量以及小区选择或重选过程操作,从而能够有效降低终端设备的处理负担,节省终端设备的电量。In this way, since the access network device indicates the first cell to the terminal device, the terminal device can camp on the first cell in the inactive state without performing cell measurement and cell selection or reselection process operations, thereby The processing burden of the terminal device can be effectively reduced, and the power of the terminal device can be saved.
在一种可能的设计中,第一小区包括第一CG,第一CG用于在所述非激活态下发送第一上行信息。In a possible design, the first cell includes a first CG, and the first CG is used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
采用该种方式,使得终端设备尽量驻留具有非激活态的CG的小区上,便于后续在非 激活态下使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息,提高非激活态的CG的使用率,更有效地利用资源。By adopting this method, the terminal equipment is made to camp on the cell with the inactive CG as much as possible, which facilitates the subsequent use of the inactive CG to send the first uplink information in the inactive state, and improves the utilization rate of the inactive CG. Use resources more efficiently.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息包括第一小区的标识;或者,所述指示信息包括所述非激活态的多个小区的标识,所述多个小区包括第一小区。In a possible design, the indication information includes an identifier of the first cell; or, the indication information includes identifiers of multiple cells in the inactive state, and the multiple cells include the first cell.
在一种可能的设计中,第一小区的小区质量大于所述多个小区中其它小区的小区质量。In a possible design, the cell quality of the first cell is greater than the cell quality of other cells in the plurality of cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the first CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG The carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息还包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the indication information further includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, and the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or Supplement upstream carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:确定第一小区满足第一预设条件后,对第一小区执行放松测量。In a possible design, the method further includes: after determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition, performing relaxation measurement on the first cell.
在一种可能的设计中,确定第一小区满足第一预设条件,包括:确定第一小区的小区质量大于或等于第一阈值;或者,确定在第一时间段内第一小区的小区质量大于或等于第一阈值。In a possible design, determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition includes: determining that the cell quality of the first cell is greater than or equal to a first threshold; or, determining the cell quality of the first cell within the first time period greater than or equal to the first threshold.
采用该种方式,可以使得终端设备尽量不再变更驻留小区,从而保证终端设备可以使用非激活态的CG发送上行信息,而且还能够降低终端设备的处理负担,节省终端设备的电量。In this way, the terminal equipment can be prevented from changing the camping cell as much as possible, thereby ensuring that the terminal equipment can use the inactive CG to send uplink information, and can also reduce the processing burden of the terminal equipment and save the power of the terminal equipment.
在一种可能的设计中,对第一小区执行放松测量,包括以下至少一项:不测量第一小区的同频小区;不测量第一小区的异频小区;不进行小区重选;不进行小区选择。In a possible design, performing relaxed measurement on the first cell includes at least one of the following: not measuring the intra-frequency cell of the first cell; not measuring the inter-frequency cell of the first cell; not performing cell reselection; Cell selection.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:确定第一小区符合第二预设条件后,终止对第一小区的放松测量。In a possible design, the method further includes: after determining that the first cell meets the second preset condition, terminating the relaxation measurement on the first cell.
采用该种方式,通过中止对第一小区的放松测量,使得终端设备可以执行小区选择或小区重选,进而驻留到其它合适的小区上。In this way, by suspending the relaxation measurement on the first cell, the terminal equipment can perform cell selection or cell reselection, and then camp on other suitable cells.
在一种可能的设计中,确定第一小区符合第二预设条件,包括以下至少一项:确定第一小区的小区质量小于第二阈值;确定在第二时间段内第一小区的小区质量小于第二阈值;确定使用第一CG发送上行信息的连续失败次数大于或等于第三阈值;确定在第一小区发起随机接入的连续失败次数大于或等于第四阈值。In a possible design, determining that the first cell meets the second preset condition includes at least one of the following: determining that the cell quality of the first cell is less than a second threshold; determining that the cell quality of the first cell within the second time period is less than the second threshold; it is determined that the number of consecutive failures to send uplink information using the first CG is greater than or equal to the third threshold; it is determined that the number of consecutive failures to initiate random access in the first cell is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:从接入网设备接收配置信息,所述配置信息包括以下至少一项:第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值、第一时间段的时长、第二时间段的时长。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving configuration information from the access network device, where the configuration information includes at least one of the following: a first threshold, a second threshold, a third threshold, a fourth threshold, a first threshold The duration of the time period and the duration of the second time period.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息。In a possible design, the indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于接入网设备,或者也可以应用于接入网设备中的芯片。以该方法应用于接入网设备为例,在该方法中,接入网设备确定指示信息,所述指示信息指示非激活态对应的第一小区,第一小区用于终端设备在所述非激活态下驻留;以及,向终端设备发送所述指示信息。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to an access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in an access network device. Taking the method applied to an access network device as an example, in this method, the access network device determines indication information, the indication information indicates the first cell corresponding to the inactive state, and the first cell is used by the terminal device in the non-active state. camping in the active state; and sending the indication information to the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一小区包括第一CG,第一CG用于在所述非激活态下发送第一上行信息。In a possible design, the first cell includes a first CG, and the first CG is used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息包括第一小区的标识;或者,所述指示信息包括所述非激活态的多个小区的标识,所述多个小区包括第一小区。In a possible design, the indication information includes an identifier of the first cell; or, the indication information includes identifiers of multiple cells in the inactive state, and the multiple cells include the first cell.
在一种可能的设计中,第一小区的小区质量大于所述一个或多个小区中其它小区的小区质量。In a possible design, the cell quality of the first cell is greater than the cell quality of other cells in the one or more cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the first CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG The carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息还包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the indication information further includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the indication information further includes at least one of the following items: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, and the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or Supplement upstream carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,所述指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息。In a possible design, the indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message.
需要说明的是,上述第四方面所描述的方法与第三方面所描述的方法相对应,第四方面所描述的方法中相关技术特征的有益效果可以参见第三方面的描述,具体不再赘述。It should be noted that the method described in the fourth aspect corresponds to the method described in the third aspect. For the beneficial effects of the related technical features in the method described in the fourth aspect, reference may be made to the description of the third aspect, and details are not repeated here. .
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于第一接入网设备,或者也可以应用于第一接入网设备中的芯片。以该方法应用于第一接入网设备为例,在该方法中,第一接入网设备接收来自第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG,第一CG用于终端设备在所述非激活态下发送上行信息;以及,向终端设备发送第一指示信息。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a first access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in the first access network device. Taking the method applied to the first access network device as an example, in this method, the first access network device receives first indication information from the second access network device, and the first indication information indicates the first inactive state. CG, where the first CG is used for the terminal device to send uplink information in the inactive state; and, to send the first indication information to the terminal device.
采用该种方式,在双连接场景中,辅网络设备也可以为终端设备配置非激活态的CG,从而使得终端设备在非激活态下,当驻留在辅接入网设备覆盖范围内的小区时,也可以使用CG发送上行信息,能够有效降低上行传输的功耗和信令开销。In this way, in the dual-connection scenario, the secondary network device can also configure the terminal device with an inactive CG, so that the terminal device in the inactive state can camp on a cell within the coverage of the secondary access network device. When the CG is used, the uplink information can also be sent, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of the uplink transmission.
在一种可能的设计中,第一CG对应的小区为第二接入网设备的小区。In a possible design, the cell corresponding to the first CG is the cell of the second access network device.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向第二接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending request information to the second access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:在非激活态下,预计将要到达终端设备的数据的传输周期;所述预计将要到达终端设备的数据的大小;所述预计将要到达终端设备的数据的到达时间信息。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data expected to reach the terminal device; the size of the data expected to reach the terminal device; Arrival time information of the data that will arrive at the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG The identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, The uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二接入网设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG;以及,向终端设备发送第二指示信息。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the second access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to, after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, Send the second uplink information, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state; and, the second indication information is sent to the terminal device.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于第二接入网设备, 或者也可以应用于第二接入网设备中的芯片。以该方法应用于第二接入网设备为例,在该方法中,第二接入网设备确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG,第一CG用于终端设备在所述非激活态下发送上行信息;以及,向第一接入网设备发送第一指示信息。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a second access network device, or can also be applied to a chip in the second access network device. Taking the method applied to the second access network device as an example, in this method, the second access network device determines the first indication information, the first indication information indicates the first CG in an inactive state, and the first CG is used for the terminal The device sends uplink information in the inactive state; and sends the first indication information to the first access network device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一CG对应的小区为第二接入网设备的小区。In a possible design, the cell corresponding to the first CG is the cell of the second access network device.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一接入网设备的请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving request information from the first access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:在非激活态下,预计将要到达终端设备的数据的传输周期;所述预计将要到达终端设备的数据的大小;所述预计将要到达终端设备的数据的到达时间信息。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data expected to reach the terminal device; the size of the data expected to reach the terminal device; Arrival time information of the data that will arrive at the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to the first CG; identifier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, The uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG;以及,向终端设备发送第二指示信息。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending second indication information to the first access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further used to send the terminal device after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state The second uplink information or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state; and the second indication information is sent to the terminal device.
需要说明的是,上述第六方面所描述的方法与第五方面所描述的方法相对应,第六方面所描述的方法中相关技术特征的有益效果可以参见第五方面的描述,具体不再赘述。It should be noted that the method described in the sixth aspect corresponds to the method described in the fifth aspect. For the beneficial effects of the related technical features in the method described in the sixth aspect, reference may be made to the description of the fifth aspect, and details are not repeated here. .
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以为终端设备或者设置在终端设备中的芯片。所述通信装置具备实现上述第一方面或第三方面的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括执行上述第一方面或第三方面涉及步骤所对应的模块或单元或手段(means),所述功能或单元或手段可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip provided in the terminal device. The communication device has the function of implementing the first aspect or the third aspect. For example, the communication device includes a module or unit or means corresponding to the steps involved in executing the first aspect or the third aspect, and the function Either unit or means may be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理单元、通信单元,其中,通信单元可以用于收发信号,以实现该通信装置和其它装置之间的通信,比如,通信单元用于接收来自终端设备的配置信息;处理单元可以用于执行该通信装置的一些内部操作。处理单元、通信单元执行的功能可以和上述第一方面涉及的操作相对应。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to implement communication between the communication device and other devices, for example, the communication unit is used to receive data from Configuration information of the terminal device; the processing unit can be used to perform some internal operations of the communication device. The functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the first aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器,还可以包括收发器,所述收发器用于收发信号,所述处理器执行程序指令,以完成上述第一方面或第三方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。其中,所述通信装置还可以包括一个或多个存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,所述存储器可以保存实现上述第一方面或第三方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第一方面或第三方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication apparatus includes a processor, and may also include a transceiver, where the transceiver is used for transmitting and receiving signals, and the processor executes program instructions to accomplish any of the first aspect or the third aspect above methods in possible designs or implementations. Wherein, the communication device may further include one or more memories, which are used for coupling with the processor, and the memories may store necessary computer programs or instructions for implementing the functions involved in the first aspect or the third aspect. The processor can execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, make the communication device realize any possible design or implementation of the first aspect or the third aspect. method.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器,处理器可以用于与存储器耦合。所 述存储器可以保存实现上述第一方面或第三方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第一方面或第三方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In one possible design, the communication device includes a processor, which may be operative to couple with the memory. The memory may hold necessary computer programs or instructions to implement the functions referred to in the first or third aspect above. The processor can execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, make the communication device realize any possible design or implementation of the first aspect or the third aspect. method.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和接口电路,其中,处理器用于通过所述接口电路与其它装置通信,并执行上述第一方面或第三方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, wherein the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute any possible design or implementation of the first aspect or the third aspect above method in method.
第八方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以为接入网设备(比如第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备)或者设置在接入网设备中的芯片。所述通信装置具备实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括执行上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面涉及操作所对应的模块或单元或手段,所述模块或单元或手段可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be an access network device (such as a first access network device or a second access network device) or a chip provided in the access network device. The communication device has the function of implementing the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect. For example, the communication device includes performing the functions related to the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspect. The modules or units or means corresponding to the operation can be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理单元、通信单元,其中,通信单元可以用于收发信号,以实现该通信装置和其它装置之间的通信,比如,通信单元用于接收来自终端设备的配置信息;处理单元可以用于执行该通信装置的一些内部操作。处理单元、通信单元执行的功能可以和上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面涉及的操作相对应。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to implement communication between the communication device and other devices, for example, the communication unit is used to receive data from Configuration information of the terminal device; the processing unit can be used to perform some internal operations of the communication device. The functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器,处理器可以用于与存储器耦合。所述存储器可以保存实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In one possible design, the communication device includes a processor, which may be operative to couple with the memory. The memory may hold necessary computer programs or instructions to implement the functions referred to in the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects described above. The processor can execute computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the communication device can implement any of the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects above. methods in possible designs or implementations.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和存储器,存储器可以保存实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions to implement the functions involved in the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects above. The processor can execute computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the communication device can implement any of the second, fourth, fifth or sixth aspects above. methods in possible designs or implementations.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和接口电路,其中,处理器用于通过所述接口电路与其它装置通信,并执行上述第二方面、第四方面、第五方面或第六方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, wherein the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect or the first aspect The method in any possible design or implementation of the six aspects.
可以理解地,上述第七方面或第八方面中,处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现。此外,以上处理器可以为一个或多个,存储器可以为一个或多个。存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,或者存储器与处理器分离设置。在具体实现过程中,存储器可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。It can be understood that, in the above seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, the processor may be implemented by hardware or by software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software When implemented, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory. In addition, the above processors may be one or more, and the memory may be one or more. The memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor. In a specific implementation process, the memory and the processor may be integrated on the same chip, or may be separately provided on different chips. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the manner of setting the memory and the processor.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,该通信系统可以包括终端设备和接入网设备;其中,终端设备可以用于执行上述第一方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法,接入网设备可以用于执行上述第二方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法;或者,终端设备可以用于 执行上述第三方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法,接入网设备可以用于执行上述第四方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system may include a terminal device and an access network device; wherein, the terminal device may be used to execute any of the possible design methods in the first aspect above, The access network device can be used to execute the method in any possible design of the second aspect above; or, the terminal device can be used to execute the method in any possible design of the third aspect above, the access network device The method in any possible design of the fourth aspect may be used to perform the above.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,该通信系统可以包括第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备,其中,第一接入网设备可以用于执行上述第五方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法,第二接入网设备可以用于执行上述第六方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system may include a first access network device and a second access network device, where the first access network device may be configured to perform the above-mentioned fifth aspect The method in any possible design, the second access network device may be used to execute the method in any possible design of the sixth aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信系统还可以包括终端设备,终端设备与第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备建立有双连接。In a possible design, the communication system may further include a terminal device, and the terminal device establishes dual connections with the first access network device and the second access network device.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机可读指令,当计算机读取并执行所述计算机可读指令时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer-readable instructions are stored in the computer storage medium, and when a computer reads and executes the computer-readable instructions, the computer is made to execute the above-mentioned first aspect The method in any possible design to the sixth aspect.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,当计算机读取并执行所述计算机程序产品时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer reads and executes the computer program product, causes the computer to execute the method in any possible design of the first to sixth aspects.
第十三方面,本申请提供一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的软件程序,以实现上述第一方面至第六方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and is configured to read and execute a software program stored in the memory, so as to implement the above-mentioned first to sixth aspects A method in any of the six possible designs.
本申请的这些方面或其它方面在以下实施例的描述中会更加简明易懂。These and other aspects of the present application will be more clearly understood in the description of the following embodiments.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例适用的一种网络架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable;
图2a为本申请实施例提供的一种CU-DU分离架构的示意图;FIG. 2a is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU separation architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2b为本申请实施例提供的又一种CU-DU分离架构的示意图;FIG. 2b is a schematic diagram of still another CU-DU separation architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种四步随机接入过程示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of a four-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种两步随机接入过程示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a two-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例一提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例二提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的可能的示例性框图;FIG. 8 is a possible exemplary block diagram of the apparatus involved in the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
图1为本申请实施例适用的一种网络架构示意图。如图1所示,终端设备(比如终端设备1301或终端设备1302)可接入到无线网络,以通过无线网络获取外网(例如数据网络(data network,DN))的服务,或者通过无线网络与其它设备通信,如可以与其它终端设备通信。该无线网络包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)和核心网(core network,CN);其中,RAN也可以称为接入网(access network,AN),用于将终端设备接入到无线网络,CN用于对终端设备进行管理并提供与DN通信的网关。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied. As shown in FIG. 1 , a terminal device (such as a terminal device 1301 or a terminal device 1302 ) can access a wireless network to obtain services from an external network (such as a data network (DN)) through the wireless network, or through the wireless network Communicate with other devices, such as can communicate with other terminal devices. The wireless network includes a radio access network (RAN) and a core network (core network, CN); wherein, the RAN may also be called an access network (AN), which is used to access terminal devices to Wireless network, CN is used to manage terminal equipment and provide gateway for communication with DN.
其中,RAN中可以包括一个或多个接入网设备,比如接入网设备1101、接入网设备 1102。CN中可以包括一个或多个核心网网元,比如核心网网元120。The RAN may include one or more access network devices, such as access network device 1101 and access network device 1102. The CN may include one or more core network elements, such as the core network element 120 .
下面分别对终端设备、接入网设备、核心网网元进行详细说明。The terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network network elements are described in detail below.
一、终端设备1. Terminal equipment
终端设备,又可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE),包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备可以包括无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、订户单元、订户站,移动站、远程站、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端、接入终端、用户终端、用户代理、或用户装备等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端设备的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备,例如功耗较低的设备,或存储能力有限的设备,或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。Terminal equipment, also known as user equipment (UE), includes equipment that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users, for example, may include handheld devices with wireless connectivity, or processing devices connected to wireless modems . The terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN. The terminal equipment may include wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/machine-type communication ( machine-to-machine/machine-type communications, M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (Internet of things, IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, remote station, access point (access point, AP) ), remote terminal, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, or user equipment, etc. For example, these may include mobile telephones (or "cellular" telephones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-embedded mobile devices, and the like. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants), PDA), etc. Also includes constrained devices, such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing power, etc. For example, it includes information sensing devices such as barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
本申请实施例中,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统或可实现终端设备功能的组合器件、部件,该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiments of the present application, the device for realizing the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a combined device or component capable of realizing the function of the terminal device. Can be installed in terminal equipment. In this embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices. In the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the device for realizing the function of the terminal being a terminal device as an example.
二、接入网设备2. Access network equipment
接入网设备为将终端设备接入到无线网络的节点或设备,接入网设备又可以称为基站。接入网设备例如包括但不限于:5G通信系统中的新一代基站(generation Node B,gNB)、演进型节点B(evolved node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站((home evolved nodeB,HeNB)或(home node B,HNB))、基带单元(baseBand unit,BBU)、传输接收点(transmitting and receiving point,TRP)、发射点(transmitting point,TP)、或移动交换中心等。An access network device is a node or device that accesses a terminal device to a wireless network, and the access network device may also be called a base station. Access network equipment, for example, includes but is not limited to: a new generation base station (generation Node B, gNB), an evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB), a radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC) in the 5G communication system, Node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station ((home evolved nodeB, HeNB) or (home node B, HNB)) , baseband unit (baseBand unit, BBU), transmitting and receiving point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (transmitting point, TP), or mobile switching center.
本申请实施例中,用于实现接入网设备的功能的装置可以是接入网设备,也可以是能够支持接入网设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统或可实现接入网设备功能的组合器件、部件,该装置可以被安装在接入网设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现接入网设备的功能的装置是接入网设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiments of the present application, the device for implementing the function of the access network device may be the access network device, or may be a device capable of supporting the access network device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a device capable of realizing the function of the access network device The combination device and component of the device can be installed in the access network equipment. In the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the device for implementing the functions of the access network equipment as an example of the access network equipment.
其中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的接口可以为Uu接口(或称为空口)。当然,在未来通信中,这些接口的名称可以不变,或者也可以用其它名称代替,本申请对此不限定。示例性地,接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构,例如控制面协议层结构可以包括RRC层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、 无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层;用户面协议层结构可以包括PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层,在一种可能的实现中,PDCP层之上还可以包括业务数据适配(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层。The interface between the access network device and the terminal device may be a Uu interface (or called an air interface). Of course, in future communications, the names of these interfaces may remain unchanged, or may be replaced with other names, which are not limited in this application. Exemplarily, the communication between the access network device and the terminal device follows a certain protocol layer structure, for example, the control plane protocol layer structure may include an RRC layer, a packet data convergence layer protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer, a wireless link. The radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer and the physical layer; the user plane protocol layer structure may include the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the physical layer. In the implementation, the PDCP layer may also include a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer.
接入网设备可以由一个节点实现RRC、PDCP、RLC和MAC等协议层的功能,或者可以由多个节点实现这些协议层的功能。例如,在一种演进结构中,接入网设备可以包括一个或多个集中单元(centralized unit,CU)和一个或多个分布单元(distributed unit,DU),多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。作为示例,CU和DU之间的接口可以称为F1接口,其中,控制面(control panel,CP)接口可以为F1-C,用户面(user panel,UP)接口可以为F1-U。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分:比如图2a所示,PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP层以下协议层(例如RLC层和MAC层等)的功能设置在DU。The access network device may implement the functions of protocol layers such as RRC, PDCP, RLC, and MAC by one node, or may implement the functions of these protocol layers by multiple nodes. For example, in an evolved structure, an access network device may include one or more centralized units (centralized units, CUs) and one or more distributed units (distributed units, DUs), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU . As an example, an interface between a CU and a DU may be referred to as an F1 interface, wherein a control plane (control panel, CP) interface may be an F1-C, and a user plane (user panel, UP) interface may be an F1-U. The CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, as shown in Figure 2a, the functions of the PDCP layer and the above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (such as the RLC layer and the MAC layer, etc.) are set in the DU.
可以理解地,上述对CU和DU的处理功能按照协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,也可以按照其他的方式进行划分,比如RLC层以上协议层的功能设置在CU,RLC层及以下协议层的功能设置在DU,又比如可以将CU或者DU划分为具有更多协议层的功能,又比如CU或DU还可以划分为具有协议层的部分处理功能。在一种设计中,将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU,将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。在另一种设计中,还可以按照业务类型或者其他系统需求对CU或者DU的功能进行划分,例如按时延划分,将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU,不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。在另一种设计中,CU也可以具有核心网的一个或多个功能。示例性地,CU可以设置在网络侧方便集中管理;DU可以具有多个射频功能,也可以将射频功能拉远设置。本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。It can be understood that the above division of the processing functions of the CU and DU according to the protocol layer is only an example, and can also be divided in other ways, for example, the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the RLC layer and the following protocol layers. The function of the CU is set in the DU. For example, the CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers. For example, the CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with protocol layers. In one design, some functions of the RLC layer and functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are placed in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are placed in the DU. In another design, the functions of the CU or DU can also be divided according to the service type or other system requirements, for example, by the delay, the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in the DU, and do not need to meet the delay. The required functionality is set in the CU. In another design, the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network. Exemplarily, the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management; the DU can have multiple radio functions, or the radio functions can be set remotely. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
示例性地,CU的功能可以由一个实体来实现,或者也可以由不同的实体来实现。例如,如图2b所示,可以对CU的功能进行进一步切分,即将控制面和用户面分离并通过不同实体来实现,分别为控制面CU实体(即CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(即CU-UP实体),CU-CP实体和CU-UP实体可以与DU相耦合,共同完成接入网设备的功能。CU-CP实体与CU-UP实体之间的接口可以为E1接口,CU-CP实体与DU之间的接口可以为F1-C接口,CU-UP实体与DU之间的接口可以为F1-U接口。其中,一个DU和一个CU-UP可以连接到一个CU-CP。在同一个CU-CP控制下,一个DU可以连接到多个CU-UP,一个CU-UP可以连接到多个DU。Exemplarily, the functions of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may also be implemented by different entities. For example, as shown in Figure 2b, the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane are separated and implemented by different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (ie, the CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity. (ie the CU-UP entity), the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the access network device. The interface between the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity may be the E1 interface, the interface between the CU-CP entity and the DU may be the F1-C interface, and the interface between the CU-UP entity and the DU may be the F1-U interface interface. Among them, one DU and one CU-UP can be connected to one CU-CP. Under the control of the same CU-CP, one DU can be connected to multiple CU-UPs, and one CU-UP can be connected to multiple DUs.
需要说明的是:在上述图2a和图2b所示意的架构中,CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备,或者终端设备产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装后透传给终端设备或CU。以下实施例中如果涉及这种信令在DU和终端设备之间的传输,此时,DU对信令的发送或接收包括这种场景。例如,RRC或PDCP层的信令最终会处理为物理层的数据发送给终端设备,或者,由接收到的物理层的数据转变而来。在这种架构下,该RRC或PDCP层的信令,即也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和射频装置发送的。It should be noted that: in the architectures shown in the foregoing Figures 2a and 2b, the signaling generated by the CU may be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device may be sent to the CU through the DU. The DU may not parse the signaling, but directly encapsulate it through the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU. In the following embodiments, if the transmission of such signaling between the DU and the terminal device is involved, at this time, the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario. For example, the signaling of the RRC or PDCP layer will eventually be processed as the data of the physical layer and sent to the terminal device, or converted from the received data of the physical layer. Under this architecture, the signaling of the RRC or PDCP layer can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or sent by the DU and the radio frequency device.
三、核心网网元3. Core network elements
以5G通信系统为例,CN中的核心网网元可以包括接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function, SMF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元等,具体不做限定。Taking the 5G communication system as an example, the core network elements in the CN may include access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, and user plane elements. Function (user plane function, UPF) network element, policy control function (policy control function, PCF) network element, etc., which are not specifically limited.
上述图1所示意的网络架构可以适用于各种无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)的通信系统中,例如可以是4G(或者称为长期演进(long term evolution,LTE))通信系统,也可以是5G(或者称为新无线(new radio,NR))通信系统,当然也可以是未来的通信系统。本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着通信网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。本申请以下实施例中的装置,根据其实现的功能,可以位于终端设备或接入网设备。当采用以上CU-DU的结构时,接入网设备可以为CU、或DU、或包括CU和DU的接入网设备。The network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above can be applied to communication systems of various radio access technologies (RATs), such as 4G (or long term evolution (LTE)) communication systems, It can also be a 5G (or called new radio (NR)) communication system, and of course it can also be a future communication system. The network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. The evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems. The apparatuses in the following embodiments of the present application may be located in terminal equipment or access network equipment according to the functions implemented by them. When the above CU-DU structure is adopted, the access network device may be a CU, or a DU, or an access network device including a CU and a DU.
在上述图1所示意的网络架构中,终端设备的状态可以包括RRC空闲态、RRC非激活态和RRC连接态。其中,RRC空闲态可简称为空闲态,RRC非激活态可简称为非激活态,也可以称为第三态,RRC连接态可简称为连接态。In the above-mentioned network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , the states of the terminal equipment may include an RRC idle state, an RRC inactive state, and an RRC connected state. The RRC idle state may be referred to as idle state for short, the RRC inactive state may be referred to as inactive state or the third state for short, and the RRC connected state may be referred to as connected state for short.
本申请的实施例中,当终端设备处于连接态时,存在终端设备和接入网设备之间的RRC连接。此时,接入网设备知道该终端设备在该接入网设备的覆盖范围或管理范围内,例如接入网设备知道该终端设备在该接入网设备所管理的小区的覆盖范围内;核心网知道该终端设备在哪个接入网设备的覆盖范围或管理范围内,核心网知道通过哪个接入网设备可以定位到或者找到该终端设备。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device is in the connected state, there is an RRC connection between the terminal device and the access network device. At this time, the access network device knows that the terminal device is within the coverage or management range of the access network device, for example, the access network device knows that the terminal device is within the coverage of the cell managed by the access network device; the core The network knows which access network device covers or manages the terminal device, and the core network knows through which access network device the terminal device can be located or found.
当终端设备处于非激活态时,没有终端设备和接入网设备之间的RRC连接。此时,接入网设备不知道该终端设备是否在该接入网设备的覆盖范围或管理范围内,例如接入网设备不知道该终端设备是否在该接入网设备所管理的小区的覆盖范围内;核心网知道该终端设备在哪个接入网设备的覆盖范围或管理范围内,核心网知道通过哪个接入网设备可以定位到或者找到该终端设备。当终端设备是非激活态时,终端设备可以从接入网设备接收寻呼消息、同步信号、广播消息、和/或系统信息等。When the terminal device is in an inactive state, there is no RRC connection between the terminal device and the access network device. At this time, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is within the coverage or management range of the access network device, for example, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is within the coverage of the cell managed by the access network device The core network knows which access network device covers or manages the terminal device, and the core network knows through which access network device the terminal device can be located or found. When the terminal device is in an inactive state, the terminal device may receive a paging message, a synchronization signal, a broadcast message, and/or system information, etc. from the access network device.
当终端设备处于空闲态时,没有终端设备和接入网设备之间的RRC连接。此时,接入网设备不知道该终端设备是否在该接入网设备的覆盖范围内或者是否在该接入网设备的管理范围内,例如接入网设备不知道该终端设备是否在该接入网设备所管理的小区的覆盖范围内;核心网不知道终端设备在哪个接入网设备的覆盖范围内或者管理范围内,核心网不知道通过哪个接入网设备可以定位到或者找到该终端设备。当终端设备是RRC空闲态时,终端设备可以从接入网设备接收寻呼消息、同步信号、广播消息、和/或系统信息等。When the terminal device is in an idle state, there is no RRC connection between the terminal device and the access network device. At this time, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is within the coverage of the access network device or whether it is within the management scope of the access network device, for example, the access network device does not know whether the terminal device is in the access network device. Within the coverage of the cell managed by the network access device; the core network does not know which access network device the terminal device is within the coverage or management range, and the core network does not know through which access network device it can locate or find the terminal. equipment. When the terminal device is in the RRC idle state, the terminal device may receive paging messages, synchronization signals, broadcast messages, and/or system information, etc. from the access network device.
针对于非激活态的终端设备来说,需要发送上行数据时,一种可能的方式为,恢复与接入网设备的RRC连接,即终端设备的RRC状态可以切换到RRC连接态,进而发送上行数据;又一种可能的方式为,在随机接入过程中发送上行数据。For a terminal device in an inactive state, when uplink data needs to be sent, a possible way is to restore the RRC connection with the access network device, that is, the RRC state of the terminal device can be switched to the RRC connected state, and then send the uplink data. data; another possible way is to send uplink data in the random access process.
示例性地,随机接入过程可以包括四步随机接入过程和两步随机接入过程。终端设备可以通过四步随机接入过程中的第三消息(Msg3)发送上行数据,可以称为早期数据传输(early data transmission,EDT);或者,终端设备也可以通过两步随机接入过程中的消息A(MsgA)发送上行数据。Exemplarily, the random access procedure may include a four-step random access procedure and a two-step random access procedure. The terminal device can send uplink data through the third message (Msg3) in the four-step random access process, which can be called early data transmission (EDT); or, the terminal device can also send the uplink data through the two-step random access process. The message A (MsgA) sends the uplink data.
(1)四步随机接入过程(1) Four-step random access process
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种四步随机接入过程示意图。如图3所示,四步随机接入过程可以包括:FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a four-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the four-step random access procedure may include:
S300,接入网设备向终端设备发送配置信息,配置信息包括随机接入配置信息和通过第三消息能发送的数据量门限;相应地,终端设备可以接收配置信息。S300, the access network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes random access configuration information and a data volume threshold that can be sent through the third message; correspondingly, the terminal device can receive the configuration information.
其中,随机接入配置信息可以包括随机接入前导码(preamble)和/或随机接入资源(随机接入资源用于发送随机接入前导码),该随机接入前导码和/或随机接入资源可以专用于EDT。Wherein, the random access configuration information may include a random access preamble (preamble) and/or random access resources (random access resources are used for sending random access preambles), the random access preamble and/or random access Incoming resources can be dedicated to EDT.
S301,终端设备通过物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)向接入网设备发送随机接入前导码,即向接入网设备发送消息1(Msg1),则接入网设备从终端设备接收消息1。S301, the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the access network device through a physical random access channel (PRACH), that is, sends a message 1 (Msg1) to the access network device, then the access network device sends a message from the terminal to the access network device. Device receives message 1.
此处,当终端设备确定需要发送上行数据时,可以将上行数据的数据量与数据量门限进行比较,若确定上行数据的数据量小于或等于数据量门限,则可以执行S301。此外,若是上行数据的数据量大于数据量门限,则终端设备将不能执行EDT,而是需要先建立或恢复RRC连接,进而再发送上行数据。Here, when the terminal device determines that uplink data needs to be sent, the data volume of the uplink data may be compared with the data volume threshold, and if it is determined that the data volume of the uplink data is less than or equal to the data volume threshold, S301 may be performed. In addition, if the data volume of the uplink data is greater than the data volume threshold, the terminal device will not be able to perform EDT, but needs to establish or restore an RRC connection first, and then send the uplink data.
S302,接入网设备在检测到终端设备发送的随机接入前导码后,向终端设备发送随机接入响应(random access response,RAR),即向终端设备发送消息2(Msg2),则终端设备从接入网设备接收消息2。其中,消息2可以指示物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)的资源位置。S302: After detecting the random access preamble sent by the terminal device, the access network device sends a random access response (RAR) to the terminal device, that is, sends a message 2 (Msg2) to the terminal device, then the terminal device sends a random access response (RAR) to the terminal device. Message 2 is received from the access network device. Wherein, message 2 may indicate the resource location of a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel, PUSCH).
S303,终端设备根据消息2指示的PUSCH的资源位置,通过PUSCH向接入网设备发送消息3(Msg3),则接入网设备从终端设备接收消息3。其中,消息3可以包括上行数据。S303, the terminal device sends a message 3 (Msg3) to the access network device through the PUSCH according to the resource location of the PUSCH indicated by the message 2, and the access network device receives the message 3 from the terminal device. Wherein, message 3 may include uplink data.
示例性地,终端设备可以确定消息2指示PUSCH是否可以用于发送上行数据,若可以,则终端设备可以执行上述S303。否则,终端设备将不能执行EDT,而是需要先建立或恢复RRC连接,进而再发送上行数据。Exemplarily, the terminal device can determine whether the message 2 indicates whether the PUSCH can be used to send uplink data, and if so, the terminal device can perform the above S303. Otherwise, the terminal device will not be able to perform EDT, but needs to establish or restore the RRC connection first, and then send the uplink data.
S304,接入网设备接收消息3,并向终端设备发送消息4(Msg4),相应地,终端设备可以从接入网设备接收消息4。S304, the access network device receives the message 3, and sends the message 4 (Msg4) to the terminal device, correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the message 4 from the access network device.
可选地,消息3中可以包括RRC连接恢复请求(RRC connection resume request)。可选地,消息4中可以包括以下信息中的一种或多种:RRC连接恢复(RRC connection resume)消息、RRC连接释放(RRC connection release)消息、消息3中的PUSCH的应答(acknowledgement)/否定应答(negative acknowledgement,NACK)、和功率控制命令等。Optionally, message 3 may include an RRC connection resume request (RRC connection resume request). Optionally, message 4 may include one or more of the following information: RRC connection resume (RRC connection resume) message, RRC connection release (RRC connection release) message, PUSCH acknowledgement (acknowledgement)/ Negative acknowledgement (NACK), and power control commands, etc.
(2)两步随机接入过程(2) Two-step random access process
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种两步随机接入过程示意图。如图4所示,两步随机接入过程可以包括:FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a two-step random access process according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, the two-step random access procedure may include:
S401,终端设备通过PRACH向接入网设备发送随机接入前导码,并通过PUSCH向接入网设备发送上行数据,即终端设备向接入网设备发送消息A(MsgA)。S401 , the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the access network device through PRACH, and sends uplink data to the access network device through the PUSCH, that is, the terminal device sends a message A (MsgA) to the access network device.
S402,接入网设备接收到消息A后,向终端设备发送消息B(MsgB)。S402, after receiving the message A, the access network device sends a message B (MsgB) to the terminal device.
可选地,消息A中可以包括RRC连接恢复请求消息。可选地,消息B中可以包括以下信息中的一种或多种:RRC连接恢复消息、RRC连接释放消息、消息A中的PUSCH的ACK/NACK、和功率控制命令等。Optionally, message A may include an RRC connection recovery request message. Optionally, message B may include one or more of the following information: RRC connection recovery message, RRC connection release message, ACK/NACK of PUSCH in message A, and power control commands, etc.
此外,上述S402中,接入网设备需要解码两部分内容:即随机接入前导码和上行数 据。通常,解码随机接入前导码比较容易,而解码上行数据比较困难。当接入网设备成功解码随机接入前导码和上行数据时,MsgB可以包括成功随机接入响应(success RAR);当接入网设备成功解码随机接入前导码,但是未成功解码上行数据时,MsgB可以包括回退随机接入响应(fallback RAR)。In addition, in the above S402, the access network device needs to decode two parts of content: namely, the random access preamble and the uplink data. Generally, it is easier to decode the random access preamble, but more difficult to decode the uplink data. When the access network device successfully decodes the random access preamble and uplink data, the MsgB may include a successful random access response (success RAR); when the access network device successfully decodes the random access preamble but fails to decode the uplink data , the MsgB may include a fallback random access response (fallback RAR).
进一步地,若接入网设备向终端设备发送success RAR,则终端设备可以向接入网设备发送针对该success RAR的混合自动重传请求进程(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)反馈信息,即HARQ ACK;其中,HARQ ACK用于通知网络设备该success RAR已经成功解码。若接入网设备向终端设备发送fallback RAR,则终端设备可以根据该fallback RAR,该fallback RAR可以指示PUSCH的资源位置,进而终端设备可以回退到四步随机接入过程,通过PUSCH重新向接入网设备发送上行数据。Further, if the access network device sends the success RAR to the terminal device, the terminal device can send the hybrid automatic repeat request process (hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ) feedback information for the success RAR to the access network device, that is, the HARQ ACK. ; Among them, the HARQ ACK is used to notify the network device that the success RAR has been successfully decoded. If the access network device sends a fallback RAR to the terminal device, the terminal device can indicate the resource location of the PUSCH according to the fallback RAR, and then the terminal device can fall back to the four-step random access process and re-direct the connection through the PUSCH. The network access device sends uplink data.
采用上述方式,在随机接入过程中发送上行数据时,以四步随机接入过程为例,当上行数据的数据量比数据量门限大或者上行数据的数据量比上行授权所指示的资源可容纳的数据量大时,需要进入连接态才能发送上行数据,从而会导致不必要的功耗和信令开销。Using the above method, when sending uplink data in the random access process, taking the four-step random access process as an example, when the data volume of the uplink data is larger than the data volume threshold or the data volume of the uplink data is more than the resources indicated by the uplink grant can be When the amount of data to be accommodated is large, it is necessary to enter the connected state to send uplink data, which will lead to unnecessary power consumption and signaling overhead.
基于此,本申请实施例中将针对非激活态的终端设备与接入网设备进行上行数据传输的相关实现进行研究。Based on this, in the embodiments of the present application, research will be conducted on the related implementation of uplink data transmission between a terminal device in an inactive state and an access network device.
下面结合实施例一至实施例三对本申请实施例进行详细描述。The embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to Embodiments 1 to 3.
实施例一Example 1
在实施例一中,本申请实施例提供的通信方法可以包括:终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一配置授权(configured grant,CG),进而终端设备在非激活态下,可以使用第一CG发送第一上行信息。采用该种方式,非激活态的终端设备可以使用CG来发送上行信息,相比于恢复RRC连接发送上行信息或者在随机接入过程中发送上行信息的方式来说,能够有效降低上行传输的功耗和信令开销。In Embodiment 1, the communication method provided in this embodiment of the present application may include: a terminal device receiving first indication information from an access network device, where the first indication information indicates a first configured grant (configured grant, CG) in an inactive state , and further in the inactive state, the terminal device can use the first CG to send the first uplink information. In this way, the terminal device in the inactive state can use the CG to send the uplink information. Compared with the way of restoring the RRC connection and sending the uplink information or sending the uplink information during the random access process, the function of the uplink transmission can be effectively reduced. consumption and signaling overhead.
下面分别结合图5,描述一种可能的实现流程。A possible implementation process is described below with reference to FIG. 5 respectively.
图5为本申请实施例一提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图。如图5所示,该方法可以包括S501至S506,本申请实施例对S501至S506的执行顺序不作限制。FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5 , the method may include S501 to S506, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of S501 to S506.
S501,接入网设备向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息。相应地,终端设备可以接收一个或多个CG的配置信息。S501 , the access network device sends configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, and the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in a connected state. Accordingly, the terminal device may receive configuration information of one or more CGs.
为便于描述,本申请实施例中可以将用于终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息的CG称为连接态的CG,比如上述一个或多个CG;类似地,将下文中用于终端设备在非激活态下发送第一上行信息的CG称为非激活态的CG。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的上行信息(比如第一上行信息或第二上行信息等)可以包括上行数据,但并不限定只包括上行数据。For ease of description, in this embodiment of the present application, the CG used by the terminal device to send the second uplink information in the connected state may be referred to as the CG in the connected state, such as the above one or more CGs; similarly, the CG used for the terminal device in the following The CG in which the device sends the first uplink information in the inactive state is called the CG in the inactive state. It should be noted that the uplink information (such as the first uplink information or the second uplink information, etc.) in the embodiment of the present application may include uplink data, but is not limited to include only uplink data.
示例性地,接入网设备向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息之前,终端设备可以与接入网设备建立RRC连接,并进入连接态。接入网设备的覆盖范围内可以包括一个或多个小区,比如接入网设备的覆盖范围内包括小区1、小区2、小区3、小区4、小区5和小区6。当终端设备处于连接态时,终端设备可以工作在接入网设备的覆盖范围内的某一个小区上,即终端设备在该小区上与接入网设备进行通信。或者,终端设备也可以通过载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)的方式工作在多个小区(比如小区1、小区2、小区3、小区4、小区5)上,即终端设备可以在多个小区上与接入网设备进行通信;载波聚合是 将两个或更多的载波单元(component carrier,CC)(也可以简称为载波)聚合在一起以支持更大的传输带宽,每个载波单元可以对应一个小区,即一个载波单元等同于一个小区。Exemplarily, before the access network device sends the configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, the terminal device may establish an RRC connection with the access network device and enter a connected state. The coverage of the access network device may include one or more cells, for example, the coverage of the access network device includes cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, cell 5, and cell 6. When the terminal device is in the connected state, the terminal device can work on a certain cell within the coverage of the access network device, that is, the terminal device communicates with the access network device on the cell. Alternatively, the terminal device can also work in multiple cells (such as cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5) through carrier aggregation (CA), that is, the terminal device can work in multiple cells. Communicate with access network equipment; carrier aggregation is to aggregate two or more carrier units (component carriers, CC) (also referred to as carriers) to support a larger transmission bandwidth, and each carrier unit can correspond to One cell, that is, one carrier unit is equivalent to one cell.
一、针对接入网设备配置CG的实现进行描述。1. Describe the implementation of the access network device configuration CG.
本申请实施例中,终端设备对上行资源的使用,可以由接入网设备进行动态调度或者非动态调度。在动态调度场景下,接入网设备可以为终端设备分配上行资源,并通过下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)向终端设备指示所分配的上行资源。在非动态调度场景下,接入网设备可以为终端设备配置一个或多个CG,进而终端设备可以在CG所指示的资源上发送上行信息。In this embodiment of the present application, the use of uplink resources by the terminal device may be dynamically scheduled or non-dynamically scheduled by the access network device. In the dynamic scheduling scenario, the access network equipment can allocate uplink resources to the terminal equipment, and indicate the allocated uplink resources to the terminal equipment through downlink control information (DCI). In a non-dynamic scheduling scenario, the access network device can configure one or more CGs for the terminal device, and then the terminal device can send uplink information on the resources indicated by the CG.
进一步地,CG可以包括两种类型,分别为类型1(type 1)和类型2(type 2)。针对于类型1,接入网设备可以向终端设备发送CG的配置信息,CG的配置信息可以包括资源的周期、资源的时域位置和频域位置等。除非终端设备收到释放命令,否则可以认为该资源周期性出现。可选地,CG的配置信息还可以包括与资源匹配的调制编码方式(modulation and coding scheme,MCS),如此,终端设备在使用该资源发送上行信息时,可以采用与该资源匹配的MCS对上行信息进行编码和调制处理。可选地,CG的配置信息还可以包括以下参数中的一种或多种:开环功控相关参数、波形、冗余版本、冗余版本序列、重复次数、跳频模式、资源分配类型、HARQ进程数、解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)相关参数、资源块组(Resource Block Group,RBG)大小。Further, the CG can include two types, namely type 1 (type 1) and type 2 (type 2). For type 1, the access network device may send the configuration information of the CG to the terminal device, and the configuration information of the CG may include the period of the resource, the time domain location and the frequency domain location of the resource, and the like. Unless the terminal device receives a release command, it can be considered that the resource occurs periodically. Optionally, the configuration information of the CG may also include a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) that matches the resource. In this way, when the terminal device uses the resource to send uplink information, the MCS that matches the resource can be used to pair the uplink. The information is encoded and modulated. Optionally, the configuration information of the CG may also include one or more of the following parameters: open-loop power control related parameters, waveform, redundancy version, redundancy version sequence, repetition times, frequency hopping mode, resource allocation type, The number of HARQ processes, parameters related to demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the size of resource block group (RBG).
针对类型2,接入网设备可以向终端设备发送CG的配置信息,CG的配置信息可以包括资源的周期。可选地,CG的配置信息还可以包括以下参数中的一种或多种:开环功控相关参数、波形、冗余版本、冗余版本序列、重复次数、跳频模式、资源分配类型、DMRS相关参数和HARQ进程数。进一步地,接入网设备还可以向终端设备发送DCI以激活该资源。可选地,该DCI可以包括以下参数中的一种或多种:资源的时域位置、资源的频域位置和与资源匹配的MCS。For type 2, the access network device may send the configuration information of the CG to the terminal device, and the configuration information of the CG may include the period of the resource. Optionally, the configuration information of the CG may also include one or more of the following parameters: open-loop power control related parameters, waveform, redundancy version, redundancy version sequence, repetition times, frequency hopping mode, resource allocation type, DMRS related parameters and the number of HARQ processes. Further, the access network device may also send DCI to the terminal device to activate the resource. Optionally, the DCI may include one or more of the following parameters: the time domain location of the resource, the frequency domain location of the resource, and the MCS matching the resource.
示例性地,上述类型1或类型2中,接入网设备可以通过RRC消息向终端设备发送CG的配置信息,具体不做限定。此外,CG的配置信息还可以包括其它可能的信息,比如可以包括CG的标识,具体不做限定。可以理解地,接入网设备为终端设备配置的连接态的CG可以包括类型1的CG和/或类型2的CG。Exemplarily, in the above type 1 or type 2, the access network device may send the configuration information of the CG to the terminal device through an RRC message, which is not specifically limited. In addition, the configuration information of the CG may also include other possible information, for example, may include the identifier of the CG, which is not specifically limited. It can be understood that the connected state CG configured by the access network device for the terminal device may include a type 1 CG and/or a type 2 CG.
此外,考虑到终端设备可能有多种业务,不同业务的到达时间、到达周期、数据包的大小可能不同,因此,接入网设备可以为终端设备配置多个CG。In addition, considering that the terminal device may have multiple services, the arrival time, arrival period, and data packet size of different services may be different. Therefore, the access network device may configure multiple CGs for the terminal device.
二、针对CG与小区、载波、BWP的对应关系进行描述。2. Describe the correspondence between CG and cell, carrier, and BWP.
本申请实施例中,CG可以是针对小区进行配置的。若接入网设备为终端设备配置的连接态的CG包括多个CG,则这多个CG可以对应同一小区或者也可以对应不同的小区。举个例子,连接态的CG包括CG1、CG2、CG3、CG4和CG5,终端设备工作在小区1、小区2、小区3、小区4、小区5上,则CG1、CG2可以对应小区1,CG3可以对应小区2,CG4可以对应小区3,小区4无CG,CG5可以对应小区5。此外,当同一小区对应多个CG时,多个CG对应的资源大小、资源的时频位置等可以不相同。In this embodiment of the present application, the CG may be configured for a cell. If the CG in the connected state configured by the access network device for the terminal device includes multiple CGs, the multiple CGs may correspond to the same cell or may correspond to different cells. For example, CGs in the connected state include CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5, and the terminal equipment works on cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5, then CG1, CG2 can correspond to cell 1, and CG3 can Corresponding to cell 2, CG4 can correspond to cell 3, cell 4 has no CG, and CG5 can correspond to cell 5. In addition, when the same cell corresponds to multiple CGs, the resource sizes and time-frequency positions of the resources corresponding to the multiple CGs may be different.
进一步地,接入网设备可以为一个小区配置一个下行载波和两个上行载波,以提升系统的上行覆盖能力;其中,两个上行载波分别为:补充上行(supplement uplink,SUL)载波和正常上行(normal uplink,NUL)载波。此种情形下,CG还可以是针对载波进行配置的,比如某一小区对应的CG可以配置在SUL载波和/或NUL载波上。举个例子,小区1 对应的CG包括CG1和CG2,小区1配置有SUL载波和NUL载波,则CG1可以对应SUL载波(即CG1所指示的资源在频域上位于SUL载波),CG2可以对应NUL载波(即CG2所指示的资源在频域上位于NUL载波);或者,CG1、CG2均对应SUL载波;又或者,CG1、CG2均对应NUL载波。Further, the access network equipment can configure one downlink carrier and two uplink carriers for a cell to improve the uplink coverage capability of the system; wherein, the two uplink carriers are respectively: supplementary uplink (supplement uplink, SUL) carrier and normal uplink (normal uplink, NUL) carrier. In this case, the CG may also be configured for the carrier, for example, the CG corresponding to a certain cell may be configured on the SUL carrier and/or the NUL carrier. For example, the CG corresponding to cell 1 includes CG1 and CG2, and cell 1 is configured with SUL carrier and NUL carrier, then CG1 can correspond to the SUL carrier (that is, the resource indicated by CG1 is located on the SUL carrier in the frequency domain), and CG2 can correspond to the NUL carrier. The carrier (that is, the resource indicated by CG2 is located on the NUL carrier in the frequency domain); or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to the SUL carrier; or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to the NUL carrier.
再进一步地,一个载波可以包括一个或多个BWP,此种情形下,CG还可以是针对BWP进行配置的。举个例子,CG1、CG2均对应小区1的NUL载波,当小区1的NUL包括BWP1和BWP2时,CG1可以对应BWP1(即CG1所指示的资源在频域上位于BWP1),CG2可以对应BWP2(即CG2所指示的资源在频域上位于BWP2);或者,CG1、CG2均对应BWP1;又或者,CG1、CG2均对应BWP2。Still further, a carrier may include one or more BWPs, and in this case, the CG may also be configured for BWPs. For example, CG1 and CG2 both correspond to the NUL carrier of cell 1. When the NUL of cell 1 includes BWP1 and BWP2, CG1 can correspond to BWP1 (that is, the resource indicated by CG1 is located in BWP1 in the frequency domain), and CG2 can correspond to BWP2 ( That is, the resource indicated by CG2 is located in BWP2 in the frequency domain); or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to BWP1; or, both CG1 and CG2 correspond to BWP2.
需要说明的是,上述S501为可选步骤,也就是说,接入网设备可以为终端设备配置连接态的CG,或者也可以不为终端设备配置连接态的CG。It should be noted that the above S501 is an optional step, that is, the access network device may configure a CG in the connected state for the terminal device, or may not configure the CG in the connected state for the terminal device.
此外,终端设备接收到一个或多个CG的配置信息后,若在连接态下需要发送第二上行信息,则可以使用其中一个CG发送第二上行信息。In addition, after receiving the configuration information of one or more CGs, if the terminal device needs to send the second uplink information in the connected state, it can use one of the CGs to send the second uplink information.
S502,终端设备向接入网设备发送请求信息,请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG;相应地,接入网设备可以接收请求信息。S502, the terminal device sends request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state; correspondingly, the access network device may receive the request information.
此处,终端设备向接入网设备发送请求信息的情形可以有多种,下面描述两种可能的情形,分别为情形1和情形2。Here, there may be multiple situations in which the terminal device sends the request information to the access network device. Two possible situations are described below, namely situation 1 and situation 2.
一、针对情形1进行描述。1. Describe the situation 1.
在情形1中,终端设备可以在处于连接态时向接入网设备发送请求信息。比如,终端设备可以在接收到接入网设备为终端设备配置的连接态的CG之前或之后,向接入网设备发送请求信息。In case 1, the terminal device may send request information to the access network device when it is in the connected state. For example, the terminal device may send request information to the access network device before or after receiving the CG in the connected state configured by the access network device for the terminal device.
此种情形下,请求信息可以为新设计的专用于请求非激活态的CG的消息。或者,请求信息也可以为承载在某一消息(具体消息不做限定)中的信息;比如,请求信息可以包括以下至少一项:非激活态的候选CG的标识;候选CG对应的小区的标识;候选CG对应的BWP的标识;候选CG对应的上行载波的标识;第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。其中,候选CG可以包括连接态的CG中的至少一个CG;第一上行信息可以理解为终端设备在非激活态下想要发送的上行信息。In this case, the request information may be a newly designed message dedicated to requesting a CG in an inactive state. Alternatively, the request information may also be information carried in a certain message (the specific message is not limited); for example, the request information may include at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG ; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information. The candidate CG may include at least one CG among the CGs in the connected state; the first uplink information may be understood as uplink information that the terminal device wants to send in the inactive state.
比如,当请求信息包括候选CG(比如CG1)的标识和候选CG对应的小区(比如小区1)的标识时,表示终端设备想要使用小区1对应的CG1在非激活态发送第一上行信息;当请求信息包括小区(比如小区1)的标识(而未包括候选CG的标识)时,表示终端设备想要使用小区1对应的所有CG在非激活态发送第一上行信息。采用该种方式,由于请求信息中包括上述信息,从而使得接入网设备接收到请求信息后,可以有针对性地为终端设备配置非激活态的CG。For example, when the request information includes the identity of the candidate CG (such as CG1) and the identity of the cell (such as cell 1) corresponding to the candidate CG, it indicates that the terminal device wants to use the CG1 corresponding to cell 1 to send the first uplink information in the inactive state; When the request information includes the identity of the cell (eg, cell 1) (but not the identity of the candidate CG), it means that the terminal device wants to use all CGs corresponding to cell 1 to send the first uplink information in the inactive state. In this way, since the above information is included in the request information, after receiving the request information, the access network device can configure an inactive CG for the terminal device in a targeted manner.
二、针对情形2进行描述。Second, describe the situation 2.
在情形2中,终端设备可以在处于非激活态时向接入网设备发送请求信息。比如,接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息;相应地,终端设备可以接收RRC连接释放消息,并进入非激活态;进一步地,终端设备进入非激活态后,若需要发送第一上行信息,则可以确定非激活态的驻留小区(比如第一小区),并驻留在第一小区,进而在第一小区上向接入网设备发送请求信息。In case 2, the terminal device may send request information to the access network device when it is in an inactive state. For example, the access network device sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device can receive the RRC connection release message and enter the inactive state; further, after the terminal device enters the inactive state, if it needs to send the first uplink information, the inactive camping cell (such as the first cell) can be determined, and camping in the first cell, and then sending request information to the access network device on the first cell.
此种情形下,在一个示例中,请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG,可以理解为,请求 信息用于请求第一小区对应的非激活态的CG。示例性地,请求信息可以为第一消息,第一消息为用于随机接入过程的消息,比如第一消息为四步随机接入过程中的第三消息或者两步随机接入过程中的消息A,也就是说,终端设备是通过发送第三消息或消息A,来隐式地请求第一小区对应的非激活态的CG。或者,请求信息也可以为承载在第一消息(比如四步随机接入过程中的第三消息或者两步随机接入过程中的消息A)中的信息;比如,请求信息可以包括以下至少一项:非激活态的候选CG的标识、候选CG对应的BWP的标识、候选CG对应的上行载波的标识、第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。其中,第一小区包括连接态的CG,比如CG1、CG2和CG3,候选CG可以包括CG1、CG2和CG3中的至少一个CG。In this case, in an example, the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state, which can be understood as the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell. Exemplarily, the request information may be a first message, and the first message is a message used for a random access procedure, for example, the first message is the third message in the four-step random access procedure or the third message in the two-step random access procedure. The message A, that is to say, the terminal device implicitly requests the CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell by sending the third message or the message A. Alternatively, the request information may also be information carried in the first message (such as the third message in the four-step random access procedure or the message A in the two-step random access procedure); for example, the request information may include at least one of the following Item: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG, the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG, and the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information. The first cell includes connected CGs, such as CG1, CG2, and CG3, and the candidate CGs may include at least one CG among CG1, CG2, and CG3.
此外,针对于上述情形2,终端设备驻留在第一小区之后,可以先判断第一小区是否包括非激活态的CG,若不包括非激活态的CG,则可以向接入网设备发送请求信息,若包括非激活态的CG,则可以使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息。其中,比如第一小区所包括的非激活态的CG可以为接入网设备通过S503中的实现方式1配置的,也就是说,S502中的情形1(对应S503中的实现方式1)和情形2(对应S503中的实现方式2)可以为分别独立实施的方案,或者二者也可以结合实施。当二者结合实施时,一种可能的场景为,接入网设备通过RRC连接释放消息为终端设备配置了非激活态的CG(对应第二小区),而当终端设备进入非激活态后,驻留在第一小区(第一小区没有非激活态的CG),则可以向接入网设备请求第一小区对应的非激活态的CG。In addition, for the above situation 2, after the terminal device camps on the first cell, it can first determine whether the first cell includes a CG in an inactive state, and if it does not include a CG in an inactive state, it can send a request to the access network device If the information includes an inactive CG, the inactive CG may be used to send the first uplink information. For example, the inactive CG included in the first cell may be configured by the access network device through the implementation mode 1 in S503, that is, the situation 1 in S502 (corresponding to the implementation mode 1 in S503) and the situation 2 (corresponding to the implementation mode 2 in S503 ) may be solutions implemented independently, or the two may also be implemented in combination. When the two are implemented in combination, a possible scenario is that the access network device configures the terminal device with an inactive CG (corresponding to the second cell) through the RRC connection release message, and when the terminal device enters the inactive state, When camping on the first cell (the first cell does not have a CG in an inactive state), the access network device may request a CG in an inactive state corresponding to the first cell.
需要说明的是,上述S502为可选步骤,也就是说,终端设备可以向接入网设备发送请求信息,进而接入网设备可以根据请求信息为终端设备配置非激活态的CG;或者,终端设备也可以不向接入网设备发送请求信息。It should be noted that the above S502 is an optional step, that is, the terminal device may send request information to the access network device, and then the access network device may configure an inactive CG for the terminal device according to the request information; or, the terminal device The device may also not send request information to the access network device.
S503,接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的CG(比如第一CG);相应地,终端设备接收第一指示信息。S503 , the access network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information indicates an inactive CG (eg, the first CG); correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
此处,接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息的方式可以有多种,下面描述两种可能的实现方式,分别为实现方式1和实现方式2。Here, there may be multiple manners for the access network device to send the first indication information to the terminal device, and two possible implementation manners are described below, namely implementation manner 1 and implementation manner 2.
一、针对实现方式1进行描述。1. Describe implementation mode 1.
在实现方式1中(该实现方式可以对应S502中的情形1),接入网设备可以向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,RRC连接释放消息包括第一指示信息。In implementation 1 (this implementation may correspond to situation 1 in S502), the access network device may send an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, where the RRC connection release message includes the first indication information.
在一个示例中,接入网设备可以从连接态的CG中选择部分或全部CG作为非激活态的CG。也就是说,非激活态的CG可以属于连接态的CG,比如连接态的CG包括CG1、CG2、CG3、CG4和CG5,非激活态的CG可以包括CG1、CG2。此种情形下,以非激活态的CG包括CG1为例,第一指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:CG1的标识;CG1对应的小区的标识;CG1对应的BWP的标识;CG1对应的上行载波的标识。CG1对应的上行载波可以为SUL载波或NUL载波。In one example, the access network device may select some or all of the CGs in the connected state as the CGs in the inactive state. That is, the CG in the inactive state may belong to the CG in the connected state. For example, the CG in the connected state includes CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5, and the CG in the inactive state may include CG1 and CG2. In this case, taking the inactive CG including CG1 as an example, the first indication information may include at least one of the following: the identity of CG1; the identity of the cell corresponding to CG1; the identity of the BWP corresponding to CG1; the uplink carrier corresponding to CG1 's identification. The uplink carrier corresponding to CG1 may be a SUL carrier or a NUL carrier.
其中,当第一指示信息包括CG1的标识和CG1对应的小区(比如小区1)的标识时,表示小区1对应的CG1可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。当第一指示信息包括至少一个小区(比如小区1)的标识(而并未包括CG的标识)时,表示小区1对应的CG(即上述S502中为终端设备配置的小区1上的CG,比如CG1、CG2)均可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。又比如,当第一指示信息包括小区1的标识和小区1上的BWP1的标识时,表示BWP1对应的CG(即上述S502中为终端设备配置的小区1的BWP1上的CG)均可 以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。Wherein, when the first indication information includes the identity of the CG1 and the identity of the cell corresponding to the CG1 (eg, the cell 1), it indicates that the CG1 corresponding to the cell 1 can be used to send uplink information in an inactive state. When the first indication information includes the identity of at least one cell (such as cell 1) (but does not include the identity of the CG), it indicates the CG corresponding to cell 1 (that is, the CG on cell 1 configured for the terminal device in S502 above, such as Both CG1 and CG2) can be used to send uplink information in an inactive state. For another example, when the first indication information includes the identity of the cell 1 and the identity of the BWP1 on the cell 1, the CG corresponding to the BWP1 (that is, the CG on the BWP1 of the cell 1 configured for the terminal device in the above S502) can be used for both Send uplink information in the inactive state.
需要说明的是:(1)上述描述了第一指示信息所包括的内容的一种示例,在其它可能的示例中,比如,第一指示信息可以包括1个比特,若该比特的取值为1,则表示连接态的CG均可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息;或者,若该比特的取值为1,则表示连接态的CG中的部分或全部CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息;进一步地,第一指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:CG的标识、CG对应的小区的标识、CG对应的BWP的标识、CG对应的上行载波的标识,以进一步地指示具体是哪些CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。此外,若该比特的取值为0,则可以表示连接态的CG均不能用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。It should be noted that: (1) The above describes an example of the content included in the first indication information. In other possible examples, for example, the first indication information may include 1 bit, if the value of the bit is 1, it means that all CGs in the connected state can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state; or, if the value of this bit is 1, it means that some or all of the CGs in the connected state can be used in the inactive state. The uplink information is sent in the state of the Indicates which CGs can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state. In addition, if the value of this bit is 0, it can indicate that none of the CGs in the connected state can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
(2)若终端设备向接入网设备发送了请求信息,且请求信息包括上述S503所描述的信息,则接入网设备可以参考请求信息,从连接态的CG中选择部分或全部CG作为非激活态的CG。在一个示例中,接入网设备确定的非激活态的CG可以与请求信息所请求的候选CG有交集;举个例子,候选CG包括CG1、CG2和CG3,接入网设备确定的非激活态的CG包括CG1、CG2;再举个例子,候选CG包括CG1、CG2,接入网设备确定的非激活态的CG包括CG1、CG2和CG3;再举个例子,候选CG包括CG1、CG2,接入网设备确定的非激活态的CG也包括CG1、CG2。在又一个示例中,接入网设备确定的非激活态的CG可以与请求信息所请求的候选CG无交集(即二者完全不同);举个例子,候选CG包括CG1、CG2,接入网设备确定的非激活态的CG包括CG3、CG4。(2) If the terminal device sends the request information to the access network device, and the request information includes the information described in the above S503, the access network device may refer to the request information, and select some or all CGs from the CGs in the connected state as non-contact CGs. Active CG. In an example, the CG in the inactive state determined by the access network device may have an intersection with the candidate CG requested by the request information; for example, the candidate CGs include CG1, CG2 and CG3, and the inactive state determined by the access network device For another example, the candidate CGs include CG1 and CG2, and the inactive CGs determined by the access network device include CG1, CG2, and CG3; for another example, the candidate CGs include CG1 and CG2, and then The inactive CG determined by the network access device also includes CG1 and CG2. In yet another example, the inactive CG determined by the access network device may have no intersection with the candidate CG requested by the request information (that is, the two are completely different); for example, the candidate CG includes CG1 and CG2, and the access network The CGs in the inactive state determined by the device include CG3 and CG4.
在又一个示例中,接入网设备可以为终端设备新配置非激活态的CG。此种情形下,若接入网设备为终端设备配置了连接态的CG,则非激活态的CG可以不同于连接态的CG。比如连接态的CG包括CG1、CG2、CG3、CG4和CG5,而非激活态的CG可以包括CG6、CG7。此种情形下,以非激活态的CG包括CG6为例,则第一指示信息可以包括CG6的配置信息。进一步地,第一指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:CG6对应的小区的标识;CG6对应的BWP的标识;CG6对应的上行载波的标识,CG6对应的上行载波可以为SUL载波或NUL载波。In yet another example, the access network device may newly configure an inactive CG for the terminal device. In this case, if the access network device configures the CG in the connected state for the terminal device, the CG in the inactive state may be different from the CG in the connected state. For example, the CGs in the connected state include CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5, and the CGs in the inactive state include CG6 and CG7. In this case, taking the inactive CG including CG6 as an example, the first indication information may include configuration information of CG6. Further, the first indication information may also include at least one of the following: the identity of the cell corresponding to CG6; the identity of the BWP corresponding to CG6; the identity of the uplink carrier corresponding to CG6, and the uplink carrier corresponding to CG6 may be a SUL carrier or a NUL carrier.
需要说明的是:在其它可能的示例中,第一指示信息和连接态的CG的配置信息可以承载于同一消息;也就是说,接入网设备可以在为终端设备配置连接态的CG时,指示连接态的CG中哪些CG可以用于在非激活态下发送第一上行信息,或者,接入网设备可以为终端设备同时配置连接态的CG(比如CG1、CG2、CG3、CG4和CG5)和非激活态的CG(比如CG6、CG7)。此种情形下,可以理解为S501和S503同时执行。此外,当第一指示信息包括多项信息时,这多项信息可以是承载于同一条消息,或者也可以承载于不同消息,具体不做限定。It should be noted that: in other possible examples, the first indication information and the configuration information of the CG in the connected state may be carried in the same message; that is, when the access network device configures the CG in the connected state for the terminal device, Indicate which CGs in the connected state can be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state, or the access network device can configure the connected state CGs (such as CG1, CG2, CG3, CG4, and CG5) for the terminal device at the same time. and inactive CGs (eg CG6, CG7). In this case, it can be understood that S501 and S503 are executed simultaneously. In addition, when the first indication information includes multiple pieces of information, the multiple pieces of information may be carried in the same message, or may also be carried in different messages, which is not specifically limited.
二、针对实现方式2进行描述。2. Describe the implementation mode 2.
在实现方式2中(该实现方式可以对应S503中的情形2),第一指示信息可以承载于第二消息,第二消息为用于随机接入过程的消息,比如四步随机接入过程中的第四消息或者两步随机接入过程中的消息B。In implementation mode 2 (this implementation mode may correspond to situation 2 in S503), the first indication information may be carried in the second message, and the second message is a message used for the random access process, for example, in the four-step random access process The fourth message or message B in the two-step random access procedure.
在一个示例中,接入网设备可以从第一小区对应的连接态的CG中选择部分或全部CG作为非激活态的CG。第一小区对应的连接态的CG包括CG1、CG2和CG3,则接入网设备可以从CG1、CG2和CG3中选择至少一个作为非激活态对应的CG。以非激活态对应的CG包括CG1为例,第一指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:CG1的标识;CG1对应的BWP 的标识;CG1对应的上行载波的标识。In an example, the access network device may select some or all of the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell as the CGs in the inactive state. The CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell include CG1, CG2, and CG3, and the access network device may select at least one CG from CG1, CG2, and CG3 as the CG corresponding to the inactive state. Taking the CG corresponding to the inactive state including CG1 as an example, the first indication information may include at least one of the following: an identifier of CG1; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to CG1; and an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to CG1.
需要说明的是:(1)上述描述了第一指示信息所包括的内容的一种示例,在其它可能的示例中,比如示例1,第一指示信息可以包括1个比特,若该比特的取值为1,则表示第一小区对应的连接态的CG均可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息;或者,若该比特的取值为1,则表示第一小区对应的连接态的CG中的部分或全部CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息;进一步地,第一指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:CG的标识、CG对应的BWP的标识、CG对应的上行载波的标识,以进一步地指示具体是哪些CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。此外,若该比特的取值为0,则可以表示第一小区对应的连接态的CG均不能用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。It should be noted that: (1) The above describes an example of the content included in the first indication information. In other possible examples, such as example 1, the first indication information may include 1 bit. If the value is 1, it means that all CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state; or, if the value of this bit is 1, it means that the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell can be used to send uplink information. Some or all of the CGs may be used to send uplink information in an inactive state; further, the first indication information may also include at least one of the following: the identifier of the CG, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the CG, and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the CG. identifier to further indicate which CGs can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state. In addition, if the value of this bit is 0, it can indicate that none of the CGs in the connected state corresponding to the first cell can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
又比如示例2,接入网设备可以通过发送第四消息或消息B(successRAR),来隐式指示第一小区的连接态的CG均可以用于在非激活态下发送第一上行信息;或者,接入网设备可以通过发送第四消息或消息B(successRAR),来隐式指示第一小区的连接态的CG可以用于在非激活态下发送第一上行信息;进一步地,第四消息或消息B(successRAR)还可以包括CG的标识、CG对应的BWP的标识、CG对应的上行载波的标识,以进一步地指示具体是哪些CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息。As another example in Example 2, the access network device may send a fourth message or message B (successRAR) to implicitly indicate that all CGs in the connected state of the first cell can be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state; or , the access network device can implicitly indicate that the CG in the connected state of the first cell can be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state by sending a fourth message or message B (successRAR); further, the fourth message Or the message B (successRAR) may further include the identifier of the CG, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the CG, and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the CG, so as to further indicate which CGs can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state.
此外,实现方式2中所涉及的第四消息或消息B(successRAR)可以为RRC连接释放消息,以指示终端设备继续停留在非激活态下。In addition, the fourth message or message B (successRAR) involved in the implementation manner 2 may be an RRC connection release message, so as to instruct the terminal device to continue to stay in the inactive state.
(2)若终端设备向接入网设备发送了请求信息,且请求信息包括上述S502所描述的信息,则接入网设备可以参考请求信息,从第一小区对应的连接态的CG中选择部分或全部CG作为非激活态的CG。(2) If the terminal device sends the request information to the access network device, and the request information includes the information described in S502, the access network device may refer to the request information and select a part from the CG in the connected state corresponding to the first cell or all CGs as inactive CGs.
在又一个示例中,接入网设备可以为终端设备新配置第一小区对应的非激活态的CG。此种情形下,若接入网设备为终端设备配置了第一小区对应的连接态的CG,则第一小区对应的非激活态的CG可以不同于连接态的CG。此种情形下,以非激活态的CG包括第一CG为例,则第一指示信息可以包括第一CG的配置信息。进一步地,第一指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识。In yet another example, the access network device may newly configure a CG in an inactive state corresponding to the first cell for the terminal device. In this case, if the access network device configures the CG in the connected state corresponding to the first cell for the terminal device, the CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell may be different from the CG in the connected state. In this case, taking the inactive CG including the first CG as an example, the first indication information may include configuration information of the first CG. Further, the first indication information may further include at least one of the following items: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG.
S504,终端设备在非激活态下,使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息。S504, in the inactive state, the terminal device sends the first uplink information by using the CG in the inactive state.
此处,终端设备在非激活态下,若需要发送第一上行信息,则可以确定非激活态的驻留小区,比如确定驻留小区为小区1,则可以驻留小区1。进一步地,终端设备可以判断小区1是否包括非激活态的CG,若小区1包括非激活态的CG,则可以使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息。若小区1不包括非激活态的CG,则终端设备可以采用前文所描述的方式来发送上行信息(比如恢复RRC连接进行上行传输或者在随机接入过程中进行上行传输);比如若终端设备在随机接入过程中发送了第一上行信息(即没有恢复RRC连接,仍然处于非激活态),进一步地,若终端设备移动并驻留到小区2,若小区2包括非激活态的CG,则终端设备可以在小区2使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息。Here, in the inactive state, if the terminal device needs to send the first uplink information, it can determine the camping cell in the inactive state, for example, if the camping cell is determined to be cell 1, it can camp on cell 1. Further, the terminal device can determine whether the cell 1 includes the CG in the inactive state, and if the cell 1 includes the CG in the inactive state, the first uplink information can be sent by using the CG in the inactive state. If cell 1 does not include a CG in an inactive state, the terminal device can use the method described above to send uplink information (such as restoring the RRC connection for uplink transmission or performing uplink transmission in the random access process); for example, if the terminal device is in the The first uplink information is sent during the random access process (that is, the RRC connection is not restored, and it is still in an inactive state). Further, if the terminal device moves and camps on cell 2, if cell 2 includes a CG in the inactive state, then The terminal device may use the inactive CG in cell 2 to send the first uplink information.
示例性地,若小区1包括非激活态的CG,则终端设备还可以判断小区1对应的定时提前量是否有效,若小区1对应的定时提前量有效,则可以使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息;若小区1对应的定时提前量失效,则可以采用前文所描述的方式来发送上行信息。其中,终端设备判断小区1对应的定时提前量是否有效的方式可以有多种,比如终端设备若确定小区1对应的定时提前定时器在运行,则可以确定小区1对应的定时提前量有效。Exemplarily, if cell 1 includes an inactive CG, the terminal device can also determine whether the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid, and if the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid, it can use the inactive CG to send the Uplink information; if the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is invalid, the method described above can be used to send the uplink information. There are various ways for the terminal device to determine whether the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid. For example, if the terminal device determines that the timing advance timer corresponding to cell 1 is running, it can determine that the timing advance corresponding to cell 1 is valid.
示例性地,终端设备使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息,可以包括:终端设备使用该CG指示的资源发送第一上行信息,可选地,还可以包括:终端设备使用该CG指示的MCS对第一上行信息进行编码和调制处理。Exemplarily, sending the first uplink information by the terminal device using the inactive CG may include: the terminal device using the resources indicated by the CG to send the first uplink information, optionally, it may further include: the terminal device using the resources indicated by the CG to send the first uplink information. The MCS performs coding and modulation processing on the first uplink information.
S505,终端设备向接入网设备发送RRC连接恢复请求消息。S505, the terminal device sends an RRC connection recovery request message to the access network device.
此处,终端设备确定需要恢复RRC连接后,可以向接入网设备发送RRC连接恢复请求消息。终端设备确定需要恢复RRC连接的情形可以有多种,比如终端设备在非激活态下接收到寻呼消息,或者其它可能的情形,具体不做限定。Here, after determining that the RRC connection needs to be restored, the terminal device may send an RRC connection restoration request message to the access network device. There may be various situations in which the terminal device determines that the RRC connection needs to be restored, for example, the terminal device receives a paging message in an inactive state, or other possible situations, which are not specifically limited.
S506,接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC连接恢复消息。S506, the access network device sends an RRC connection recovery message to the terminal device.
此处,接入网设备接收到RRC连接恢复请求后,若确定恢复终端设备的RRC连接,则可以向终端设备发送RRC连接恢复消息。Here, after receiving the RRC connection restoration request, the access network device may send an RRC connection restoration message to the terminal device if it is determined to restore the RRC connection of the terminal device.
示例性地,若上述S502中接入网设备为终端设备新配置了非激活态的CG,则接入网设备还可以向终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示非激活态的CG还可用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后释放非激活态的CG。Exemplarily, if the access network device newly configures an inactive CG for the terminal device in the above S502, the access network device may also send second indication information to the terminal device, and the second indication information indicates the inactive CG. It can also be used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, or the second indication information indicates that the CG in the inactive state is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
在一个示例中,第二指示信息可以承载于RRC连接恢复消息,或者也可以承载于其它可能的消息,具体不做限定。在其它可能的示例中,第二指示信息可以与第一指示信息承载于同一消息,或者,也可以承载于不同消息,具体不做限定。In an example, the second indication information may be carried in the RRC connection recovery message, or may also be carried in other possible messages, which is not specifically limited. In other possible examples, the second indication information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message, or may also be carried in a different message, which is not specifically limited.
采用上述实施例一中的方法,接入网设备可以向终端设备指示哪些连接态的CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息,或者重新为终端设备配置非激活态的CG用于在非激活态下发送上行信息,从而使得终端设备在非激活态下,也可以使用CG发送上行信息,能够有效降低上行传输的功耗和信令开销。Using the method in Embodiment 1 above, the access network device can indicate to the terminal device which CGs in the connected state can be used to send uplink information in the inactive state, or reconfigure the terminal device with the inactive CG for use in the non-active state. The uplink information is sent in the active state, so that the terminal device can also use the CG to send the uplink information in the inactive state, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of uplink transmission.
实施例二Embodiment 2
在实施例二中,本申请实施例提供的通信方法可以包括:终端设备接收来自接入网设备的指示信息,指示信息指示非激活态下对应的第一小区,进而终端设备可以在非激活态下,驻留在第一小区。采用该种方式,由于接入网设备向终端设备指示了第一小区,从而终端设备在非激活态下可以驻留在第一小区,而无需执行小区测量以及小区选择或重选过程操作,从而能够有效降低终端设备的处理负担,节省终端设备的电量。In the second embodiment, the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include: the terminal device receives indication information from the access network device, the indication information indicates the corresponding first cell in the inactive state, and the terminal device may be in the inactive state down, camp on the first cell. In this way, since the access network device indicates the first cell to the terminal device, the terminal device can camp on the first cell in the inactive state without performing cell measurement and cell selection or reselection process operations, thereby The processing burden of the terminal device can be effectively reduced, and the power of the terminal device can be saved.
此外,根据上述实施例一的内容可以看出,若接入网设备为终端设备配置了第一小区对应的非激活态的CG,后续终端设备若在非激活态下,驻留在第二小区,而第二小区不包括非激活态的CG,则会导致终端设备在非激活态下无法有效利用非激活态的CG来发送上行信息。因此,在一个示例中,上述指示信息所指示的小区可以包括非激活态的CG,从而可以使得终端设备尽量驻留具有非激活态的CG的小区上,便于后续在非激活态下使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息,提高非激活态的CG的使用率,以更有效地利用资源。In addition, according to the content of the first embodiment, it can be seen that if the access network device configures the terminal device with a CG in the inactive state corresponding to the first cell, if the subsequent terminal device is in the inactive state, it will camp in the second cell. , and the second cell does not include the CG in the inactive state, so that the terminal device cannot effectively use the CG in the inactive state to send uplink information in the inactive state. Therefore, in an example, the cell indicated by the above indication information may include a CG in an inactive state, so that the terminal device can try to camp on a cell with a CG in the inactive state, so as to facilitate subsequent use of the inactive CG in the inactive state The CG in the inactive state sends the first uplink information to improve the utilization rate of the CG in the inactive state, so as to utilize the resources more effectively.
下面结合图6,描述一种可能的实现流程。A possible implementation process is described below with reference to FIG. 6 .
图6为本申请实施例二提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图。如图6所示,该方法可以包括S601至S604,本申请实施例对S601至S604的执行顺序不作限制。FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6 , the method may include S601 to S604, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of S601 to S604.
S601,接入网设备向终端设备发送指示信息,指示信息指示非激活态对应的小区;相应地,终端设备可以接收指示信息。S601, the access network device sends indication information to the terminal device, where the indication information indicates the cell corresponding to the inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the indication information.
此处,指示信息所指示的非激活态对应的小区,可以理解为,终端设备在非激活态下可优先驻留的小区。示例性地,非激活态对应的小区可以包括至少一个小区,至少一个小区包括第一小区。Here, the cell corresponding to the inactive state indicated by the indication information can be understood as a cell that the terminal device can preferentially camp on in the inactive state. Exemplarily, the cell corresponding to the inactive state may include at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell.
其中,指示信息指示非激活态的小区的方式可以有多种,下面描述两种可能的实现方式,分别为实现方式1和实现方式2。There may be various manners in which the indication information indicates a cell in an inactive state, and two possible implementation manners are described below, namely implementation manner 1 and implementation manner 2.
一、针对实现方式1进行描述。1. Describe implementation mode 1.
在实现方式1中,指示信息可以通过显式的方式来指示非激活态对应的小区。如上述所述,指示信息可以指示非激活态对应的一个小区(比如第一小区),或者也可以指示非激活态对应的多个小区,下面结合两种情形(即情形1和情形2)进行详细描述。In implementation manner 1, the indication information may indicate the cell corresponding to the inactive state in an explicit manner. As mentioned above, the indication information may indicate a cell (such as the first cell) corresponding to the inactive state, or may indicate multiple cells corresponding to the inactive state. A detailed description.
在情形1中,指示信息指示非激活态对应的一个小区(比如第一小区),第一小区包括非激活态的CG。示例性地,指示信息可以包括第一小区的标识。In case 1, the indication information indicates a cell (such as the first cell) corresponding to the inactive state, and the first cell includes the CG in the inactive state. Exemplarily, the indication information may include the identity of the first cell.
进一步地,以第一小区包括非激活态的第一CG为例,在一个示例中,指示信息还可以包括指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识、第一CG对应的BWP的标识、第一CG对应的上行载波的标识;此种情形下,第一CG可以属于连接态的CG。在又一个示例中,指示信息还可以包括第一CG的配置信息,可选地,指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识。此种情形下,第一CG可以为新配置的不同于连接态的CG。Further, taking the first cell including the first CG in an inactive state as an example, in an example, the indication information may further include the indication information and at least one of the following items: an identifier of the first CG, an identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG The identifier, the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG; in this case, the first CG may belong to the CG in the connected state. In yet another example, the indication information may further include configuration information of the first CG, optionally, the indication information may further include at least one of the following: an identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG . In this case, the first CG may be a newly configured CG different from the connected state.
在情形2中,指示信息指示非激活态对应的多个小区,多个小区中包括第一小区,多个小区中的每个小区都可以包括非激活态的CG;多个小区可以理解为候选驻留小区。示例性地,指示信息可以包括多个小区的标识。In case 2, the indication information indicates multiple cells corresponding to the inactive state, the multiple cells include the first cell, and each of the multiple cells may include a CG in the inactive state; multiple cells can be understood as candidates stay in the area. Exemplarily, the indication information may include identities of multiple cells.
进一步地,针对于多个小区中的每个小区,比如第一小区(第一小区包括非激活态的第一CG):在一个示例中,指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识、第一CG对应的BWP的标识、第一CG对应的上行载波的标识;在又一个示例中,指示信息还可以包括第一CG的配置信息,可选地,指示信息还可以包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识。Further, for each cell in the multiple cells, such as the first cell (the first cell includes the first CG in an inactive state): in an example, the indication information may further include at least one of the following: the first CG The identifier of the first CG, the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG, and the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG; in another example, the indication information may also include the configuration information of the first CG, optionally, the indication information may also include the following At least one item: the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG; the identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG.
二、针对实现方式2进行描述。2. Describe the implementation mode 2.
在实现方式2中,指示信息可以通过隐式的方式来指示非激活态对应的小区。比如,指示信息可以指示非激活态的CG,此种情形下,非激活态对应的小区可以为指示信息所指示的非激活态的CG所对应的小区。其中,指示信息指示非激活态的CG的相关实现可以参见实施例一中的描述。In implementation manner 2, the indication information may indicate the cell corresponding to the inactive state in an implicit manner. For example, the indication information may indicate an inactive CG. In this case, the cell corresponding to the inactive state may be a cell corresponding to the inactive CG indicated by the indication information. The related implementation of the CG in which the indication information indicates the inactive state may refer to the description in the first embodiment.
本申请实施例中,接入网设备向终端设备发送指示信息的方式可以有多种,比如接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,RRC连接释放消息包括指示信息。在一个示例中,实施例二中的指示信息和实施例一中的第一指示信息可以为同一信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the access network device may send the indication information to the terminal device in various manners, for example, the access network device sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, and the RRC connection release message includes the indication information. In an example, the indication information in the second embodiment and the first indication information in the first embodiment may be the same information.
S602,终端设备根据指示信息,在非激活态下驻留在第一小区。S602, the terminal device camps on the first cell in the inactive state according to the indication information.
此处,若指示信息指示非激活态对应的第一小区,则终端设备可以在第一小区满足驻留条件后,驻留在第一小区。若指示信息指示非激活态对应的多个小区,则终端设备可以从多个小区(即候选驻留小区)中选择一个满足驻留条件的小区(比如第一小区)作为驻留小区,进而驻留在第一小区。其中,终端设备从多个小区中选择第一小区的方式可以有多种,比如,终端设备可以根据多个小区的小区质量,选择小区质量最好的第一小区或信号质量大于预设门限的第一小区。Here, if the indication information indicates the first cell corresponding to the inactive state, the terminal device may camp on the first cell after the first cell satisfies the camping condition. If the indication information indicates multiple cells corresponding to the inactive state, the terminal device can select a cell (such as the first cell) that satisfies the camping condition from the multiple cells (ie, candidate camping cells) as the camping cell, and then camp on stay in the first district. There are various ways for the terminal device to select the first cell from the multiple cells. For example, the terminal device may select the first cell with the best cell quality or the first cell with the signal quality greater than a preset threshold according to the cell quality of the multiple cells. first district.
其中,以第一小区为例,第一小区的小区质量可以是终端设备通过测量接入网设备在该小区上发送的信号所得到的,小区质量可以包括参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)、参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)和信噪比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)中的至少一项。Wherein, taking the first cell as an example, the cell quality of the first cell may be obtained by the terminal device by measuring the signal sent by the access network device in the cell, and the cell quality may include reference signal receiving power (reference signal receiving power, At least one of RSRP), reference signal receiving quality (reference signal receiving quality, RSRQ), and signal to noise ratio (signal to interference plus noise ratio, SINR).
S603,终端设备确定第一小区满足第一预设条件后,对第一小区执行放松测量。S603: After determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition, the terminal device performs relaxation measurement on the first cell.
示例性地,终端设备确定第一小区满足第一预设条件,包括:确定第一小区的小区质量大于或等于第一阈值;或者,确定在第一时间段内第一小区的小区质量大于或等于第一阈值。Exemplarily, the terminal device determining that the first cell satisfies the first preset condition includes: determining that the cell quality of the first cell is greater than or equal to a first threshold; or, determining that the cell quality of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold within the first time period. equal to the first threshold.
示例性地,终端设备对第一小区执行放松测量,可以包括以下至少一项:不测量第一小区的同频小区;不测量第一小区的异频小区;不进行小区重选;不进行小区选择。Exemplarily, the terminal device performs relaxation measurement on the first cell, which may include at least one of the following: do not measure the intra-frequency cell of the first cell; do not measure the inter-frequency cell of the first cell; do not perform cell reselection; choose.
在现有方案中,以小区重选为例,终端设备在驻留到第一小区,且停留适当的时间(比如1s)后,可以进行小区重选过程。其中,小区重选可以分为同频的小区重选和异频的小区重选(即不同无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)之间的小区重选)。也就是说,终端设备可以对第一小区的同频小区和/或第一小区的异频小区进行测量,进而根据测量结果,执行小区重选以驻留到其它小区(比如第二小区)。然而,考虑到第一小区包括非激活态对应的CG,若终端设备通过小区重选驻留到第二小区(第二小区不包括非激活态对应的CG),则会导致无法再使用非激活态的CG发送上行信息。因此,本申请实施例中,终端设备在确定第一小区符合第一预设条件后,可以对第一小区执行放松测量,即尽量不再变更驻留小区,从而能够保证终端设备可以使用非激活态的CG发送上行信息,而且还能够降低终端设备的处理负担,节省终端设备的电量。In the existing solution, taking cell reselection as an example, the terminal device can perform the cell reselection process after camping on the first cell and staying for an appropriate time (for example, 1 s). The cell reselection can be divided into intra-frequency cell reselection and inter-frequency cell reselection (ie, cell reselection between different radio access technologies (RATs)). That is, the terminal device may measure the intra-frequency cell of the first cell and/or the inter-frequency cell of the first cell, and then perform cell reselection to camp on another cell (eg, the second cell) according to the measurement result. However, considering that the first cell includes the CG corresponding to the inactive state, if the terminal device camps on the second cell through cell reselection (the second cell does not include the CG corresponding to the inactive state), the inactive state cannot be used anymore. The CG in the state sends uplink information. Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, after determining that the first cell complies with the first preset condition, the terminal device may perform relaxed measurement on the first cell, that is, try not to change the camping cell as much as possible, so as to ensure that the terminal device can use the inactive The CG in the state can send uplink information, and it can also reduce the processing burden of the terminal device and save the power of the terminal device.
S604,终端设备确定第一小区满足第二预设条件后,终止对第一小区的放松测量。S604: After determining that the first cell satisfies the second preset condition, the terminal device terminates the relaxation measurement on the first cell.
示例性地,终端设备确定第一小区符合第二预设条件,包括以下至少一项:(1)确定第一小区的小区质量小于第二阈值;(2)确定在第二时间段内第一小区的小区质量小于第二阈值;(3)确定使用第一CG发送上行信息的连续失败次数大于或等于第三阈值;(4)确定在第一小区发起随机接入的连续失败次数大于或等于第四阈值。示例性地,终端设备终止对第一小区的放松测量,可以包括以下至少一项:测量第一小区的同频小区;测量第一小区的异频小区;进行小区重选;进行小区选择。Exemplarily, the terminal device determining that the first cell meets the second preset condition includes at least one of the following: (1) determining that the cell quality of the first cell is less than a second threshold; (2) determining that the first cell is within the second time period The cell quality of the cell is less than the second threshold; (3) it is determined that the number of consecutive failures of using the first CG to send uplink information is greater than or equal to the third threshold; (4) it is determined that the number of consecutive failures to initiate random access in the first cell is greater than or equal to Fourth threshold. Exemplarily, terminating the relaxed measurement of the first cell by the terminal device may include at least one of the following: measuring an intra-frequency cell of the first cell; measuring an inter-frequency cell of the first cell; performing cell reselection; and performing cell selection.
针对于上述(1)和/或(2),终端设备若确定第一小区符合(1)和/或(2),则说明第一小区的小区质量较差,若是继续驻留在第一小区使用非激活态的CG发送上行信息,则可能会导致上行信息传输失败,因此可以终止对第一小区的放松测量,以便执行小区选择或小区重选,驻留到其它合适的小区上。For the above (1) and/or (2), if the terminal device determines that the first cell complies with (1) and/or (2), it means that the cell quality of the first cell is poor, and if it continues to camp in the first cell Using an inactive CG to send uplink information may cause uplink information transmission failure, so the relaxation measurement on the first cell can be terminated so as to perform cell selection or cell reselection and camp on other suitable cells.
针对于上述(3)和/或(4),终端设备驻留在第一小区上时,若需要发送上行信息,则可以通过非激活态对应的CG发送上行信息,在发送完上行信息后,终端设备可以根据接入网设备的反馈信息来确定上行信息是否发送成功,若未在预设时间段内接收到反馈信息或者接收到的反馈信息指示上行信息传输失败,则终端设备可以继续使用非激活态对应的CG发送上行信息。如此重复下去,若终端设备使用非激活态对应的CG发送上行信息的连续失败次数大于或等于第三阈值,则可以终止对第一小区的放松测量,以便执行小区选择或小区重选,以驻留到其它合适的小区上。或者,当终端设备使用非激活态对应的CG发送上行信息的连续失败次数大于或等于第三阈值后,可以发起随机接入,并通过随机接入过程发送上行信息,若终端设备在第一小区发起随机接入的连续失败次数大于或等于第 四阈值,则可以终止对第一小区的放松测量,以便执行小区选择或小区重选,驻留到其它合适的小区上。For the above (3) and/or (4), when the terminal device resides on the first cell, if it needs to send uplink information, it can send the uplink information through the CG corresponding to the inactive state, and after sending the uplink information, The terminal device can determine whether the uplink information is sent successfully according to the feedback information of the access network device. If the feedback information is not received within the preset time period or the received feedback information indicates that the transmission of uplink information fails, the terminal device can continue to use the The CG corresponding to the active state sends uplink information. Repeating this, if the number of consecutive failures of the terminal equipment to send uplink information using the CG corresponding to the inactive state is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the relaxation measurement on the first cell can be terminated, so as to perform cell selection or cell reselection to settle. to other suitable cells. Alternatively, when the number of consecutive failures of the terminal device to send uplink information using the CG corresponding to the inactive state is greater than or equal to the third threshold, it can initiate random access and send uplink information through the random access process. If the terminal device is in the first cell If the number of consecutive failures to initiate random access is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold, the relaxation measurement on the first cell may be terminated, so as to perform cell selection or cell reselection and camp on other suitable cells.
需要说明的是,上述所涉及的放松测量的相关参数,比如第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值、第一时间段的时长、第二时间段的时长等,可以是由协议预先定义的,或者也可以是由接入网设备为终端设备配置的,又或者上述参数中的部分参数是由协议预先定义的,部分参数是由接入网设备为终端设备配置的,具体实现不做限定。It should be noted that the above-mentioned related parameters of relaxation measurement, such as the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold, the duration of the first time period, the duration of the second time period, etc., can be determined by The protocol is pre-defined, or it can be configured by the access network device for the terminal device, or some of the parameters in the above parameters are pre-defined by the protocol, and some parameters are configured by the access network device for the terminal device. Implementation is not limited.
实施例三Embodiment 3
上述实施例一和实施例二中,主要是以终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信为例进行描述的,本申请实施例中的方法同样可以适用于双连接场景。在双连接场景中,终端设备可以同时与两个接入网设备连接,两个接入网设备中的一个接入网设备为主接入网设备,另一个接入网设备为辅接入网设备。因此,在双连接场景中,上述实施例一或实施例二中所述涉及的接入网设备可以为主接入网设备,即可以是由主接入网设备执行上述实施例一和实施例二中所涉及的接入网设备的操作,比如为终端设备配置非激活态的CG、为终端设备配置非激活态对应的小区、为终端设备配置放松测量的相关参数(如第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值、第一时间段的时长、第二时间段的时长);或者,也可以是由辅网设备执行上述实施例一和实施例二中所涉及的接入网设备的一些操作。In the above-mentioned first and second embodiments, the communication between the terminal device and the access network device is mainly described as an example, and the methods in the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to a dual-connection scenario. In a dual-connection scenario, a terminal device can be connected to two access network devices at the same time, one of the two access network devices is the primary access network device, and the other access network device is the secondary access network device equipment. Therefore, in a dual-connection scenario, the access network device involved in the first embodiment or the second embodiment may be the primary access network device, that is, the primary access network device may execute the first and second embodiments above The operations of the access network equipment involved in the second step, such as configuring the CG in the inactive state for the terminal device, configuring the cell corresponding to the inactive state for the terminal device, and configuring the relevant parameters of the relaxation measurement for the terminal device (such as the first threshold, the first the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold, the duration of the first time period, the duration of the second time period); or, the access involved in the first and second embodiments may also be performed by the secondary network device. Some operations of network equipment.
基于此,实施例三将针对双连接场景,研究本申请实施例的一些可能的实现。在一个示例中,实施例三提供的通信方法可以包括:第一接入网设备接收来自第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG,第一CG用于终端设备在非激活态下发送上行信息;进而,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备发送第一指示信息。其中,终端设备可以与第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备建立有双连接,第一接入网设备可以为主接入网设备,第二接入网设备可以为辅接入网设备;或者,第一接入网设备可以为辅接入网设备,第二接入网设备可以为主接入网设备。Based on this, Embodiment 3 will study some possible implementations of the embodiments of the present application for a dual-connection scenario. In an example, the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 may include: the first access network device receives first indication information from the second access network device, the first indication information indicates the first CG in an inactive state, the first The CG is used for the terminal device to send uplink information in an inactive state; furthermore, the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device. The terminal device may establish dual connections with the first access network device and the second access network device, the first access network device may be the primary access network device, and the second access network device may be the secondary access network device or, the first access network device may be a secondary access network device, and the second access network device may be a primary access network device.
下面结合图7,描述一种可能的实现流程。A possible implementation flow is described below with reference to FIG. 7 .
图7为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图。如图7所示,该方法可以包括S701至S705,本申请实施例对S701至S705的执行顺序不作限制。FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7 , the method may include S701 to S705, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of S701 to S705.
S701,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送请求信息,请求信息用于请求非激活态的CG;相应地,第二接入网设备可以接收请求信息。S701, the first access network device sends request information to the second access network device, where the request information is used to request a CG in an inactive state; correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the request information.
示例性地,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送请求信息的情形可以有多种,比如,若第一接入网设备的负载较重,不能为终端设备分配非激活态的CG,则可以向第二接入网设备发送请求信息;又比如,若第一接入网设备覆盖范围内的小区不支持非激活态的CG,则可以向第二接入网设备发送请求信息。Exemplarily, there may be various situations in which the first access network device sends the request information to the second access network device. For example, if the load of the first access network device is heavy, the terminal device cannot be allocated an inactive state. CG, the request information may be sent to the second access network device; for another example, if the cells within the coverage of the first access network device do not support the inactive CG, the request information may be sent to the second access network device .
示例性地,请求信息包括以下至少一项:在非激活态下,预计将要到达终端设备的数据(即上行数据)的传输周期;预计将要到达终端设备的数据的大小(即上行数据的数据量);预计将要到达终端设备的数据的到达时间信息。请求信息还可以包括其它可能的信息,具体不做限定。Exemplarily, the request information includes at least one of the following: in the inactive state, the transmission period of the data (that is, the uplink data) that is expected to arrive at the terminal device; the size of the data that is expected to arrive at the terminal device (that is, the data volume of the uplink data). ); information on the arrival time of the data expected to arrive at the terminal device. The request information may also include other possible information, which is not specifically limited.
本申请实施例中,第一接入网设备确定请求信息所包括的上述内容的方式可以有多种,比如第一接入网设备可以根据与终端设备进行通信的历史数据传输信息,来预估在非激活态下预计将要到达终端设备的数据的传输周期、数据量、到达时间信息等。In the embodiment of the present application, the first access network device may determine the above-mentioned content included in the request information in various ways. For example, the first access network device may estimate the data transmission information according to the historical data transmission information communicated with the terminal device. In the inactive state, the transmission period, data volume, arrival time information, etc. of the data expected to arrive at the terminal device.
S702,第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送第一信息;相应地,第一接入网设备接收第一信息。S702, the second access network device sends the first information to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the first information.
S703,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一信息。S703, the first access network device sends the first information to the terminal device.
此处,第一信息可以包括以下至少一项:指示信息1、指示信息2、放松测量的相关参数。其中,指示信息1指示非激活态的CG,非激活态的CG用于终端设备在非激活态下发送第一上行信息,指示信息1的相关实现可以参见实施例一中有关第一指示信息的描述,具体不再赘述。其中,指示信息1所指示的非激活态的CG对应的小区为第二接入网设备覆盖范围内的小区。指示信息2指示非激活态对应的小区,指示信息2的相关实现可以参见实施例二中有关指示信息的描述,具体不再赘述。其中,指示信息2所指示的非激活态对应的小区为第二接入网设备覆盖范围内的小区。放松测量的相关参数可以包括第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值、第一时间段的时长、第二时间段的时长,各个参数的含义可以参见实施例二中的描述。Here, the first information may include at least one of the following: indication information 1, indication information 2, and related parameters of relaxation measurement. The indication information 1 indicates the CG in the inactive state, and the CG in the inactive state is used by the terminal device to send the first uplink information in the inactive state. For the related implementation of the indication information 1, please refer to the first indication information in the first embodiment. Description, details will not be repeated. The cell corresponding to the inactive CG indicated by the indication information 1 is a cell within the coverage of the second access network device. The indication information 2 indicates the cell corresponding to the inactive state. For the related implementation of the indication information 2, reference may be made to the description of the indication information in the second embodiment, and details are not repeated here. The cell corresponding to the inactive state indicated by the indication information 2 is a cell within the coverage of the second access network device. Relevant parameters of relaxation measurement may include a first threshold, a second threshold, a third threshold, a fourth threshold, the duration of the first time period, and the duration of the second time period. For the meaning of each parameter, refer to the description in Embodiment 2.
需要说明的是,终端设备接收到第一信息后,可以根据第一信息执行相应操作,比如可以根据指示信息1,在非激活态下使用非激活态的CG发送第一上行信息,又比如可以根据指示信息2,在非激活态下驻留在非激活态对应的小区(比如第一小区),又比如可以根据放松测量的相关参数,对第一小区执行放松测量以及终止对第一小区的放松测量。具体可以参见实施例一和实施例二中的描述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that, after receiving the first information, the terminal device may perform corresponding operations according to the first information. For example, according to the indication information 1, the CG in the inactive state may be used to send the first uplink information in the inactive state. According to the indication information 2, camping on the cell corresponding to the inactive state (such as the first cell) in the inactive state, or, for example, according to the relevant parameters of the relaxation measurement, perform the relaxation measurement on the first cell and terminate the measurement of the first cell. Relax measurement. For details, refer to the descriptions in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2, which will not be repeated here.
S704,第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送指示信息3;相应地,第一接入网设备接收指示信息3。S704 , the second access network device sends the indication information 3 to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the indication information 3 .
示例性地,若上述S702中第二接入网设备为终端设备新配置了非激活态的CG,则第二接入网设备还可以向第一接入网设备发送指示信息3,指示信息3指示非激活态的CG还可用于在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者指示信息3指示在终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后释放非激活态的CG。其中,指示信息3的相关实现可以参见实施例一中有关第二指示信息的描述,具体不再赘述。Exemplarily, if the second access network device in the above S702 newly configures an inactive CG for the terminal device, the second access network device may also send indication information 3 to the first access network device, the indication information 3 The CG indicating the inactive state can also be used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, or the indication information 3 indicates that the CG in the inactive state is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state. For the related implementation of the indication information 3, reference may be made to the description about the second indication information in the first embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
S705,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送指示信息3。S705, the first access network device sends indication information 3 to the terminal device.
采用上述方法,辅接入网设备可以向终端设备指示哪些连接态的CG可以用于在非激活态下发送上行信息,或者重新为终端设备配置非激活态的CG用于在非激活态下发送上行信息,从而使得终端设备在非激活态下,当驻留在辅接入网设备覆盖范围内的小区时,也可以使用CG发送上行信息,能够有效降低上行传输的功耗和信令开销。Using the above method, the secondary access network device can indicate to the terminal device which CGs in the connected state can be used for sending uplink information in the inactive state, or reconfigure the terminal device with CGs in the inactive state for sending in the inactive state. Uplink information, so that in the inactive state, the terminal equipment can also use the CG to send uplink information when camping on a cell within the coverage of the secondary access network equipment, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of uplink transmission.
针对于上述实施例一、实施例二和实施例三,需要说明的是:For the above-mentioned Embodiment 1, Embodiment 2 and Embodiment 3, it should be noted that:
(1)上述实施例一和实施例二可以分别单独执行,或者也可以结合实施,当实施例一和实施例二结合实施中,实施例二中的指示信息和实施例一中的第一指示信息可以为同一信息,或者也可以为不同的信息,具体不做限定。(1) The above-mentioned first and second embodiments can be implemented separately, or can also be implemented in combination. When the first and second embodiments are implemented in combination, the indication information in the second embodiment and the first indication in the first embodiment The information may be the same information, or may be different information, which is not specifically limited.
(2)实施例一至实施例三所描述的各个流程图的步骤编号仅为执行流程的一种示例,并不构成对步骤执行的先后顺序的限制,本申请实施例中相互之间没有时序依赖关系的步骤之间没有严格的执行顺序。此外,各个流程图中所示意的步骤并非全部是必须执行的步骤,可以根据实际需要在各个流程图的基础上增添或者删除部分步骤。(2) The step numbers of the flowcharts described in Embodiments 1 to 3 are only an example of the execution flow, and do not constitute a restriction on the sequence of execution of the steps, and there is no timing dependency between the embodiments of this application. There is no strict order of execution between the steps of a relationship. In addition, not all the steps shown in each flowchart are steps that must be executed, and some steps may be added or deleted on the basis of each flowchart according to actual needs.
(3)上述侧重描述了实施例一至实施例三中不同实施例之间的差异之处,除差异之处的其它内容,实施例一至实施例三之间可以相互参照。(3) The above focuses on describing the differences between the different embodiments in the first to third embodiments. Except for other contents of the differences, the first to third embodiments can be referred to each other.
(4)上述实施例一至实施例三中采用了一些5G通信系统中的消息,但在具体实施中,可能使用不同的消息或消息名称,本申请实施例对此不做限制。(4) Some messages in the 5G communication system are used in the above-mentioned Embodiments 1 to 3, but in specific implementation, different messages or message names may be used, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
上述主要从设备交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,为了实现上述功能,接入网设备或终端设备可以包括执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请的实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above functions, the access network device or the terminal device may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对接入网设备或终端设备进行功能单元的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In this embodiment of the present application, the access network device or the terminal device may be divided into functional units according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional unit may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one unit. . The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,图8示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的可能的示例性框图。如图8所示,装置800可以包括:处理单元802和通信单元803。处理单元802用于对装置800的动作进行控制管理。通信单元803用于支持装置800与其他设备的通信。可选地,通信单元803也称为收发单元,可以包括接收单元和/或发送单元,分别用于执行接收和发送操作。装置800还可以包括存储单元801,用于存储装置800的程序代码和/或数据。In the case of using an integrated unit, FIG. 8 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of the apparatus involved in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8 , the apparatus 800 may include: a processing unit 802 and a communication unit 803 . The processing unit 802 is used to control and manage the actions of the device 800 . The communication unit 803 is used to support the communication between the apparatus 800 and other devices. Optionally, the communication unit 803 is also referred to as a transceiving unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, which are respectively configured to perform receiving and sending operations. The apparatus 800 may further include a storage unit 801 for storing program codes and/or data of the apparatus 800 .
该装置800可以为上述实施例中的终端设备、或者还可以为设置在终端设备中的芯片。处理单元802可以支持装置800执行上文中各方法示例中终端设备的动作。或者,处理单元802主要执行方法示例中的终端设备的内部动作,通信单元803可以支持装置800与其它设备之间的通信。The apparatus 800 may be the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment, or may also be a chip provided in the terminal device. The processing unit 802 may support the apparatus 800 to perform the actions of the terminal device in the above method examples. Alternatively, the processing unit 802 mainly performs the internal actions of the terminal device in the method example, and the communication unit 803 may support the communication between the apparatus 800 and other devices.
具体地,在一个实施例中,通信单元803用于:接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG;以及,在非激活态下,使用第一CG发送第一上行信息。Specifically, in an embodiment, the communication unit 803 is configured to: receive first indication information from the access network device, where the first indication information indicates the first CG in the inactive state; and, in the inactive state, use the first indication information A CG sends the first uplink information.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG The identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:接收来自接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,第一CG属于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in the connected state; Wherein, the first CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following items: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, The uplink carrier corresponding to a CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:接收来自所述接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,第一CG不同于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are configured to send the second uplink in the connected state information; wherein the first CG is different from the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:接收来自所述接入网设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者第二指示信息指示在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is also used to enter the terminal device from an inactive state After the connected state, the second uplink information is sent, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,第二指示信息承载于RRC连接恢复消息。In a possible design, the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:向所述接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求所述非激活态的CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:所述非激活态的候选CG的标识;所述候选CG对应的小区的标识;所述候选CG对应的BWP的标识;所述候选CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波;第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is the normal uplink carrier or the supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述候选CG包括第一CG。In one possible design, the candidate CG includes the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:接收来自所述接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,所述候选CG属于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are configured to send the second uplink in the connected state information; wherein the candidate CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息承载于第一消息,第一消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息,或者,第一指示信息承载于第二消息,第二消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
该装置800可以为上述实施例中的接入网设备、或者还可以为设置在接入网设备中的芯片。处理单元802可以支持装置800执行上文中各方法示例中接入网设备的动作。或者,处理单元802主要执行方法示例中的接入网设备的内部动作,通信单元803可以支持装置800与其它设备之间的通信。The apparatus 800 may be the access network device in the foregoing embodiment, or may also be a chip set in the access network device. The processing unit 802 may support the apparatus 800 to perform the actions of the access network device in each method example above. Alternatively, the processing unit 802 mainly performs the internal actions of the access network device in the method example, and the communication unit 803 may support the communication between the apparatus 800 and other devices.
具体地,在一个实施例中,处理单元802用于:获取第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG,第一CG用于终端设备在非激活态下发送第一上行信息;通信单元803用于:向所述终端设备发送第一指示信息。Specifically, in one embodiment, the processing unit 802 is configured to: acquire first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a first CG in an inactive state, and the first CG is used by the terminal device to send the first uplink in an inactive state information; the communication unit 803 is configured to: send the first indication information to the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:第一CG的标识;第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the first CG; an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG; an uplink corresponding to the first CG The identifier of the carrier, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:向所述终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于所述终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息;第一CG属于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used for the terminal device to send the second Uplink information; the first CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息包括第一CG的配置信息。In a possible design, the first indication information includes configuration information of the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:第一CG对应的小区的标识;第一CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a cell corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of a BWP corresponding to the first CG; an identifier of an uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, the first CG The corresponding uplink carrier is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:向所述终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于所述终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,第一CG不同于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used for the terminal device to send the second Uplink information; wherein the first CG is different from the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一CG还用于在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行 信息,或者第二指示信息指示在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放第一CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to be used after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state , the second uplink information is sent, or the second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,第二指示信息承载于RRC连接恢复消息。In a possible design, the second indication information is carried in the RRC connection recovery message.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:接收来自所述终端设备的请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求所述非激活态的CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:所述非激活态的候选CG的标识;所述候选CG对应的小区的标识;所述候选CG对应的BWP的标识;第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波;第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。In a possible design, the request information includes at least one of the following: the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state; the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG; the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG; The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to a CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is the normal uplink carrier or the supplementary uplink carrier; the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述候选CG包括第一CG。In one possible design, the candidate CG includes the first CG.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元803还用于:向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;其中,所述候选CG属于所述一个或多个CG。In a possible design, the communication unit 803 is further configured to: send configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in the connected state; The candidate CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
在一种可能的设计中,所述请求信息承载于第一消息,第一消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
在一种可能的设计中,第一指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息,或者,第一指示信息承载于第二消息,第二消息用于随机接入过程。In a possible design, the first indication information is carried in the RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in the second message, and the second message is used for the random access procedure.
应理解以上装置中单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。且装置中的单元可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现;也可以全部以硬件的形式实现;还可以部分单元以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现,部分单元以硬件的形式实现。例如,各个单元可以为单独设立的处理元件,也可以集成在装置的某一个芯片中实现,此外,也可以以程序的形式存储于存储器中,由装置的某一个处理元件调用并执行该单元的功能。此外这些单元全部或部分可以集成在一起,也可以独立实现。这里所述的处理元件又可以成为处理器,可以是一种具有信号的处理能力的集成电路。在实现过程中,上述方法的各操作或以上各个单元可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路实现或者以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现。It should be understood that the division of units in the above apparatus is only a division of logical functions, and in actual implementation, it may be fully or partially integrated into one physical entity, or may be physically separated. And all the units in the device can be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element; also can all be realized in the form of hardware; some units can also be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element, and some units can be realized in the form of hardware. For example, each unit can be a separately established processing element, or can be integrated in a certain chip of the device to be implemented, and can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, which can be called by a certain processing element of the device and execute the unit's processing. Features. In addition, all or part of these units can be integrated together, and can also be implemented independently. The processing element described here can also become a processor, which can be an integrated circuit with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each operation of the above method or each of the above units may be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or implemented in the form of software being invoked by the processing element.
在一个例子中,以上任一装置中的单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。再如,当装置中的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时,该处理元件可以是处理器,比如通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如,这些单元可以集成在一起,以片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现。In one example, a unit in any of the above apparatuses may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, eg, one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or, one or more Multiple microprocessors (digital singnal processors, DSPs), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. For another example, when a unit in the apparatus can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler, the processing element can be a processor, such as a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), or other processors that can invoke programs. For another example, these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
以上用于接收的单元是一种该装置的接口电路,用于从其它装置接收信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该接收单元是该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路。以上用于发送的单元是一种该装置的接口电路,用于向其它装置发送信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该发送单元是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路。The above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the receiving unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices. The above unit for sending is an interface circuit of the device for sending signals to other devices. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图,其可以为以上实施例中的终端设备,用于实现以上实施例中终端设备的操作。如图9所示,该终端设备包括:天线910、射频部分920、信号处理部分930。天线910与射频部分920连接。在下行方向上,射频 部分920通过天线910接收网络设备发送的信息,将网络设备发送的信息发送给信号处理部分930进行处理。在上行方向上,信号处理部分930对终端设备的信息进行处理,并发送给射频部分920,射频部分920对终端设备的信息进行处理后经过天线910发送给网络设备。FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may be the terminal device in the above embodiment, and is used to implement operations of the terminal device in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9 , the terminal device includes: an antenna 910 , a radio frequency part 920 , and a signal processing part 930 . The antenna 910 is connected to the radio frequency part 920 . In the downlink direction, the radio frequency part 920 receives the information sent by the network device through the antenna 910, and sends the information sent by the network device to the signal processing part 930 for processing. In the upstream direction, the signal processing part 930 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the radio frequency part 920 , and the radio frequency part 920 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the network equipment through the antenna 910 .
信号处理部分930可以包括调制解调子系统,用于实现对数据各通信协议层的处理;还可以包括中央处理子系统,用于实现对终端设备操作系统以及应用层的处理;此外,还可以包括其它子系统,例如多媒体子系统,周边子系统等,其中多媒体子系统用于实现对终端设备相机,屏幕显示等的控制,周边子系统用于实现与其它设备的连接。调制解调子系统可以为单独设置的芯片。The signal processing part 930 can include a modulation and demodulation subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data; it can also include a central processing subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of the terminal device operating system and the application layer; in addition, it can also Including other subsystems, such as multimedia subsystem, peripheral subsystem, etc., wherein the multimedia subsystem is used to realize the control of the terminal equipment camera, screen display, etc., and the peripheral subsystem is used to realize the connection with other devices. The modem subsystem can be a separate chip.
调制解调子系统可以包括一个或多个处理元件931,例如,包括一个主控CPU和其它集成电路。此外,该调制解调子系统还可以包括存储元件932和接口电路933。存储元件932用于存储数据和程序,但用于执行以上方法中终端设备所执行的方法的程序可能不存储于该存储元件932中,而是存储于调制解调子系统之外的存储器中,使用时调制解调子系统加载使用。接口电路933用于与其它子系统通信。The modem subsystem may include one or more processing elements 931, including, for example, a host CPU and other integrated circuits. In addition, the modulation and demodulation subsystem may also include a storage element 932 and an interface circuit 933 . The storage element 932 is used to store data and programs, but the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may not be stored in the storage element 932, but in a memory outside the modulation and demodulation subsystem, When used, the modem subsystem is loaded for use. Interface circuit 933 is used to communicate with other subsystems.
该调制解调子系统可以通过芯片实现,该芯片包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路,其中处理元件用于执行以上终端设备执行的任一种方法的各个步骤,接口电路用于与其它装置通信。在一种实现中,终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现,例如用于终端设备的装置包括处理元件和存储元件,处理元件调用存储元件存储的程序,以执行以上方法实施例中终端设备执行的方法。存储元件可以为处理元件处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件。The modulation and demodulation subsystem can be implemented by a chip, the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to execute each step of any one of the methods performed by the above terminal equipment, and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices. In one implementation, the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler. For example, an apparatus for a terminal device includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the program stored in the storage element to Execute the method executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments. The storage element may be a storage element in which the processing element is on the same chip, that is, an on-chip storage element.
在另一种实现中,用于执行以上方法中终端设备所执行的方法的程序可以在与处理元件处于不同芯片上的存储元件,即片外存储元件。此时,处理元件从片外存储元件调用或加载程序于片内存储元件上,以调用并执行以上方法实施例中终端设备执行的方法。In another implementation, the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may be in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element. At this time, the processing element calls or loads the program from the off-chip storage element to the on-chip storage element, so as to call and execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
在又一种实现中,终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以是被配置成一个或多个处理元件,这些处理元件设置于调制解调子系统上,这里的处理元件可以为集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA,或者这些类集成电路的组合。这些集成电路可以集成在一起,构成芯片。In yet another implementation, the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are provided on the modulation and demodulation subsystem, and the processing element here may be an integrated circuit, For example: one or more ASICs, or, one or more DSPs, or, one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form chips.
终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以集成在一起,以SOC的形式实现,该SOC芯片,用于实现以上方法。该芯片内可以集成至少一个处理元件和存储元件,由处理元件调用存储元件的存储的程序的形式实现以上终端设备执行的方法;或者,该芯片内可以集成至少一个集成电路,用于实现以上终端设备执行的方法;或者,可以结合以上实现方式,部分单元的功能通过处理元件调用程序的形式实现,部分单元的功能通过集成电路的形式实现。The units of the terminal device implementing each step in the above method may be integrated together and implemented in the form of an SOC, and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method. At least one processing element and a storage element may be integrated in the chip, and the method executed by the above terminal device may be implemented in the form of a program stored in the storage element being invoked by the processing element; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated in the chip to implement the above terminal The method for device execution; or, in combination with the above implementation manners, the functions of some units are implemented in the form of calling programs by processing elements, and the functions of some units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
可见,以上用于终端设备的装置可以包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路,其中至少一个处理元件用于执行以上方法实施例所提供的任一种终端设备执行的方法。处理元件可以以第一种方式:即调用存储元件存储的程序的方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤;也可以以第二种方式:即通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路结合指令的方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤;当然,也可以结合第一种方式和第二种方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤。It can be seen that the above apparatus for a terminal device may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, where the at least one processing element is configured to execute any method performed by the terminal device provided in the above method embodiments. The processing element can execute part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device in the first way: by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: by combining the instructions with the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element Part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may be performed in the manner of the first method; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may also be performed in combination with the first manner and the second manner.
这里的处理元件同以上描述,可以通过处理器实现,处理元件的功能可以和图8中所 描述的处理单元的功能相同。示例性地,处理元件可以是通用处理器,例如CPU,还可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个微处理器DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA等,或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。存储元件可以通过存储器实现,存储元件的功能可以和图8中所描述的存储单元的功能相同。存储元件可以通过存储器实现,存储元件的功能可以和图8中所描述的存储单元的功能相同。存储元件可以是一个存储器,也可以是多个存储器的统称。The processing elements here are the same as those described above, and can be implemented by a processor, and the functions of the processing elements can be the same as those of the processing unit described in FIG. 8 . Illustratively, the processing element may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, or may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as: one or more ASICs, or, one or more microprocessors, DSPs , or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. The storage element may be implemented by a memory, and the function of the storage element may be the same as that of the storage unit described in FIG. 8 . The storage element may be implemented by a memory, and the function of the storage element may be the same as that of the storage unit described in FIG. 8 . The storage element can be one memory or a collective term for multiple memories.
图9所示的终端设备能够实现上述方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。图9所示的终端设备中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。The terminal device shown in FIG. 9 can implement each process involving the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments. The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device shown in FIG. 9 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments. To avoid repetition, the detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
参见图10,为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图,该接入网设备(或基站)可应用于如图1所示的系统架构中,执行上述方法实施例中接入网设备的功能。接入网设备100可包括一个或多个DU 1001和一个或多个CU 1002。所述DU 1001可以包括至少一个天线10011,至少一个射频单元10012,至少一个处理器10013和至少一个存储器10014。所述DU 1001部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,以及部分基带处理。CU1002可以包括至少一个处理器10022和至少一个存储器10021。Referring to FIG. 10 , which is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided in an embodiment of the present application, the access network device (or base station) can be applied to the system architecture shown in FIG. The function of the network access device. Access network device 100 may include one or more DUs 1001 and one or more CUs 1002. The DU 1001 may include at least one antenna 10011, at least one radio frequency unit 10012, at least one processor 10013 and at least one memory 10014. The DU 1001 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals, the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of baseband processing. The CU 1002 may include at least one processor 10022 and at least one memory 10021 .
所述CU 1002部分主要用于进行基带处理,对接入网设备进行控制等。所述DU 1001与CU 1002可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。所述CU 1002为接入网设备的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能。例如所述CU 1002可以用于控制接入网设备执行上述方法实施例中关于接入网设备的操作流程。The CU 1002 part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control access network equipment, and the like. The DU 1001 and the CU 1002 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station. The CU 1002 is the control center of the access network equipment, which can also be called a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete the baseband processing function. For example, the CU 1002 may be used to control the access network device to perform the operation process of the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
此外,可选的,接入网设备100可以包括一个或多个射频单元,一个或多个DU和一个或多个CU。其中,DU可以包括至少一个处理器10013和至少一个存储器10014,射频单元可以包括至少一个天线10011和至少一个射频单元10012,CU可以包括至少一个处理器10022和至少一个存储器10021。In addition, optionally, the access network device 100 may include one or more radio frequency units, one or more DUs, and one or more CUs. The DU may include at least one processor 10013 and at least one memory 10014 , the radio unit may include at least one antenna 10011 and at least one radio frequency unit 10012 , and the CU may include at least one processor 10022 and at least one memory 10021 .
在一个实例中,所述CU1002可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如5G网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述存储器10021和处理器10022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。所述DU1001可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如5G网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述存储器10014和处理器10013可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the CU1002 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or may respectively support wireless access systems of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network). The memory 10021 and the processor 10022 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board. The DU1001 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or can support a wireless access network with different access standards (such as a 5G network). LTE network, 5G network or other network). The memory 10014 and processor 10013 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
图10所示的接入网设备能够实现上述方法实施例中涉及接入网设备的各个过程。图10所示的接入网设备中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。The access network device shown in FIG. 10 can implement each process involving the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments. The operations and/or functions of each module in the access network device shown in FIG. 10 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments. To avoid repetition, the detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存 在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B和C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one item(s) below" or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s). For example "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to the present application. It will be understood that each flow and/or block in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of flows and/or blocks in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to the processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce Means for implementing the functions specified in a flow or flow of a flowchart and/or a block or blocks of a block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions The apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded on a computer or other programmable data processing device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process such that The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flow or blocks of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于终端设备或所述终端设备中的芯片,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method is applicable to a terminal device or a chip in the terminal device, and the method comprises:
    接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一配置授权CG;receiving first indication information from an access network device, where the first indication information indicates a first configuration authorization CG in an inactive state;
    在所述非激活态下,使用所述第一CG发送第一上行信息。In the inactive state, the first CG is used to send the first uplink information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一CG的标识;the identifier of the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的小区的标识;the identifier of the cell corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,所述第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, where the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send second uplink information in a connected state;
    其中,所述第一CG属于所述一个或多个CG。Wherein, the first CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述第一CG的配置信息。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information comprises configuration information of the first CG.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 4, wherein the first indication information further comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一CG对应的小区的标识;the identifier of the cell corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的BWP的标识;the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,所述第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, where the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send second uplink information in a connected state;
    其中,所述第一CG不同于所述一个或多个CG。Wherein, the first CG is different from the one or more CGs.
  7. 根据权利要求4至6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 4 to 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述接入网设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第一CG还用于在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者所述第二指示信息指示在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放所述第一CG。Receive second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information indicates that the first CG is further configured to send second uplink information after the terminal device enters a connected state from an inactive state, or The second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters a connected state from an inactive state.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求所述非激活态的CG。Sending request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 8, wherein the request information includes at least one of the following:
    所述非激活态的候选CG的标识;the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state;
    所述候选CG对应的小区的标识;the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG;
    所述候选CG对应的BWP的标识;the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG;
    所述候选CG对应的上行载波的标识,所述第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波 或补充上行载波;The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the candidate CG, the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a common uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier;
    所述第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。The identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述接入网设备的一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;receiving configuration information from one or more CGs of the access network device, where the one or more CGs are used to send second uplink information in a connected state;
    其中,所述候选CG属于所述一个或多个CG。Wherein, the candidate CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  11. 根据权利要求8至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求信息承载于第一消息,所述第一消息用于随机接入过程。The method according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息,或者,所述第一指示信息承载于第二消息,所述第二消息用于随机接入过程。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the first indication information is carried in an RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in a second message, the second message is used for random access procedure.
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述非激活态下,驻留在所述第一CG对应的小区。In the inactive state, camp on the cell corresponding to the first CG.
  14. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于接入网设备或所述接入网设备中的芯片,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method is applicable to an access network device or a chip in the access network device, and the method comprises:
    获取所述第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示非激活态的第一CG,所述第一CG用于终端设备在非激活态下发送第一上行信息;acquiring the first indication information, where the first indication information indicates a first CG in an inactive state, where the first CG is used by the terminal device to send the first uplink information in an inactive state;
    向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。Send the first indication information to the terminal device.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 14, wherein the first indication information comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一CG的标识;the identifier of the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的小区的标识;the identifier of the cell corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的BWP的标识;the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,所述第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, where the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 15, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于所述终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息;sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used by the terminal device to send second uplink information in a connected state;
    其中,所述第一CG属于所述一个或多个CG。Wherein, the first CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  17. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述第一CG的配置信息。The method according to claim 14, wherein the first indication information comprises configuration information of the first CG.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 17, wherein the first indication information further comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一CG对应的小区的标识;the identifier of the cell corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的BWP的标识;the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the first CG;
    所述第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,所述第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波。The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, where the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于所述终端设备在连接态下发送第二上行信息;sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used by the terminal device to send second uplink information in a connected state;
    其中,所述第一CG不同于所述一个或多个CG。Wherein, the first CG is different from the one or more CGs.
  20. 根据权利要求17至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第一CG还用于在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,发送第二上行信息,或者所述第二指示信息指示在所述终端设备由非激活态进入连接态后,释放所述第一CG。Send second indication information to the terminal device, the second indication information indicates that the first CG is also used to send the second uplink information after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state, or the first CG The second indication information indicates that the first CG is released after the terminal device enters the connected state from the inactive state.
  21. 根据权利要求14至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 14 to 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述终端设备的请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求所述非激活态的CG。Receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request the CG in the inactive state.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 21, wherein the request information includes at least one of the following:
    所述非激活态的候选CG的标识;the identifier of the candidate CG in the inactive state;
    所述候选CG对应的小区的标识;the identifier of the cell corresponding to the candidate CG;
    所述候选CG对应的BWP的标识;the identifier of the BWP corresponding to the candidate CG;
    所述第一CG对应的上行载波的标识,所述第一CG对应的上行载波为普通上行载波或补充上行载波;The identifier of the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG, where the uplink carrier corresponding to the first CG is a normal uplink carrier or a supplementary uplink carrier;
    所述第一上行信息对应的逻辑信道的标识。The identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first uplink information.
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the method further comprises:
    向终端设备发送一个或多个CG的配置信息,所述一个或多个CG用于在连接态下发送第二上行信息;sending configuration information of one or more CGs to the terminal device, where the one or more CGs are used to send the second uplink information in the connected state;
    其中,所述候选CG属于所述一个或多个CG。Wherein, the candidate CG belongs to the one or more CGs.
  24. 根据权利要求21至23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求信息承载于第一消息,所述第一消息用于随机接入过程。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein the request information is carried in a first message, and the first message is used for a random access procedure.
  25. 根据权利要求14至24中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息承载于RRC连接释放消息,或者,所述第一指示信息承载于第二消息,所述第二消息用于随机接入过程。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 24, wherein the first indication information is carried in an RRC connection release message, or the first indication information is carried in a second message, the second message is used for random access procedure.
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述方法的模块。A communication device, characterized by comprising a module for performing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求14至25中任一项所述方法的模块。A communication device, characterized by comprising a module for performing the method according to any one of claims 14 to 25.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器和所述存储器耦合,所述处理器用于实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor and a memory, wherein the processor is coupled to the memory, and the processor is configured to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
  29. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器和所述存储器耦合,所述处理器用于实现如权利要求14至25中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and a memory, wherein the processor and the memory are coupled, and the processor is configured to implement the method according to any one of claims 14 to 25.
  30. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和接口电路,所述接口电路用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置,所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and an interface circuit, wherein the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or transfer signals from the processor The signal is sent to other communication devices other than the communication device, and the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 13 by means of a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
  31. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和接口电路,所述接口电路用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置,所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求14至25中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and an interface circuit, wherein the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or transfer signals from the processor The signal is sent to other communication devices than the communication device, and the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 14 to 25 by means of logic circuits or executing code instructions.
  32. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指 令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法或者如权利要求14至25中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that, a computer program or instruction is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, any one of claims 1 to 13 is implemented. or the method of any one of claims 14 to 25.
  33. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求26、28、30中任一项所述的通信装置,和如权利要求27、29、31中任一项所述的通信装置。A communication system, characterized by comprising the communication device according to any one of claims 26, 28, and 30, and the communication device according to any one of claims 27, 29, and 31.
PCT/CN2020/104546 2020-07-24 2020-07-24 Communication method and apparatus WO2022016542A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/104546 WO2022016542A1 (en) 2020-07-24 2020-07-24 Communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/104546 WO2022016542A1 (en) 2020-07-24 2020-07-24 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022016542A1 true WO2022016542A1 (en) 2022-01-27

Family

ID=79729976

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/104546 WO2022016542A1 (en) 2020-07-24 2020-07-24 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022016542A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108337728A (en) * 2017-01-19 2018-07-27 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of timing advance maintaining method, apparatus and system
CN108616901A (en) * 2016-12-12 2018-10-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of method of calling terminal, terminal and the network equipment
CN109644457A (en) * 2018-11-13 2019-04-16 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Resource allocation method and device
CN110072285A (en) * 2018-01-22 2019-07-30 维沃移动通信有限公司 Configuration method, terminal and the base station of frequency domain resource
US20190313303A1 (en) * 2018-04-04 2019-10-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for performing cell reselection in wireless communication system
CN110650492A (en) * 2018-06-27 2020-01-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Measurement method, terminal and network side equipment

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108616901A (en) * 2016-12-12 2018-10-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of method of calling terminal, terminal and the network equipment
CN108337728A (en) * 2017-01-19 2018-07-27 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of timing advance maintaining method, apparatus and system
CN110072285A (en) * 2018-01-22 2019-07-30 维沃移动通信有限公司 Configuration method, terminal and the base station of frequency domain resource
US20190313303A1 (en) * 2018-04-04 2019-10-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for performing cell reselection in wireless communication system
CN110650492A (en) * 2018-06-27 2020-01-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Measurement method, terminal and network side equipment
CN109644457A (en) * 2018-11-13 2019-04-16 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Resource allocation method and device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11082857B2 (en) Inter-carrier D2D resource allocation
CN113225846B (en) Communication method and device
EP4070585A1 (en) Wus for paging for rrc inactive states
WO2021170110A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2019028792A1 (en) Resource allocation method and device
WO2021047478A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
KR20220140510A (en) Resource selection method and device, terminal
WO2021026929A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022016542A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022000495A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022022340A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021208819A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022099539A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021047479A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022151408A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2022228277A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
WO2024113577A1 (en) Method, device, and system for discontinuous data transmission and reception in wireless networks
WO2022000496A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022228414A1 (en) Paging method, communication apparatus, and system
US20230422342A1 (en) Sidelink Discontinuous Reception Configuration Method, Device, and Non-transitory Computer-Readable Storage Medium
WO2021254238A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022000494A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023185466A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024060844A1 (en) Communication method and related apparatus
WO2022206363A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20946121

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20946121

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1